Contents
Introduction ..................................... 2
AV Receiver
Connection .................................... 22
Turning On & First Time Setup..... 50
TX-NR905
Instruction Manual
Basic Operation
Playing your AV components....... 68
Listening to the Radio.................. 69
Enjoying the Listening Modes ..... 79
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Advanced Operation..................... 94
Troubleshooting.......................... 131
Please retain this manual for future reference.
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-
out the permission of the copyright holder.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
your Onkyo dealer.
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-
tering.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-
TION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.
For North American model
Pressing the [STANDBY/ON] button to select
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
cian for help.
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo
dealer.
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
6. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-
nally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
Modèle canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions—Continued
For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
Blue:
Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured mark-
ings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as
follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same
ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check for
the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.
For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We,
ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
corresponding
technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY
K. MIYAGI
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bridging Front Speakers B .........................................30
Menu Map ..................................................................88
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna ..........................31
the AV Receiver ......................................................34
Set-top box or Other Video Source .........................41
Connecting a CD Player .............................................46
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components
Changing the Input Display .......................................57
Digital Input Setup .....................................................58
Analog Input Setup ....................................................60
Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT) ...61
TV Format Setup (not North American models) .......66
AM Frequency Step Setup(on some models) ............67
Troubleshooting ...........................................131
Specifications ...............................................135
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
Amplifier
Tuner
*8
• 7-channel amplifier
• XM Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)
* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.
• 140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8
ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05%
(FTC)
*9
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)
* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.
• HD Radio reception (N. America only)
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• Speakers A and Speakers B configurations
• Powered Zone 2 capability
• 40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets (N. America only)
• 40 AM/FM presets (other models)
• AM/FM auto tuning
• Bi-amp and bridging capability for front speakers
• WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)
• RDS radio data
• Direct tuning
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry) on all chan-
nels
Others
• Massive High Current Power Supply (H.C.P.S.) trans-
former
• Network-ready for playing music files on a networked
computer or media server, or for listening to Internet
radio
Processing
• USB port for playing music files on USB mass storage
devices (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players)
*1
• THX Surround EX
*1
• Supports MP3, WMA, WAV, and M4A file formats
• THX Ultra2 certified
*11
*2
• Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction
• Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus
• IR IN and OUT
*3
• DTS , DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD
MasterAudio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,
DTS Neo:6
• Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other
AV components, with Learning and Macro functions
*4
• Neural Surround , THX-Neural
*5
• Theater-Dimensional virtual surround sound
*1
• DSD Direct
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
*6
• Re-EQ function
• Tone control on all channels (7.1)
*2
• 7-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Audio/Video
• Zone 2 with 12V trigger, level, tone, balance, pre out,
and composite video output
*3
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and pre out
*7
• 4 HDMI inputs, 2 outputs (Version 1.3a)
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc., and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,
and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)
*4
• Component video upconversion of composite video
and S-Video sources
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to compos-
ite video conversion
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)
• 3 component video inputs, 1 output
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs
*5
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.
• RS-232 control
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input
• 7.1-channel pre out
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplied Accessories
Features—Continued
Make sure you have the following accessories:
*7
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-
ing, LLC.
*8
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)
*9
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Speaker setup microphone
Indoor FM antenna
*10
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD
Radio” and “HD” Symbols are registered trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation. “HD Radio” is a trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
*11
Manufactured under license fromAudyssey Laboratories. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trade-
mark of Audyssey Laboratories.
AM loop antenna
THX Ultra2
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a prod-
uct feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guar-
antee that the Home Theater products you purchase
will give you superb performance for many years to
come. THX Ultra2 requirements define hundreds of
parameters, including power amplifier performance,
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for
both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 receiv-
ers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie
soundtracks for home theater playback.
Power cord
(Power cord varies from country to country.)
1
2
3
Speaker Cable
Speaker cable labels
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same
regardless of color.
*
*
*
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
This product incorporates copyright protection tech-
nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macro-
vision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiroom Capability
You can use four speaker systems with this AV receiver—Speakers A: a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1
channels) for enjoying DVD movies, Speakers B: a pair of stereo speakers for serious music listening, Zone 2: a stereo
speaker system in a second room, Zone 3: a stereo speaker system in a third room. And, you can select a different audio
source for each room.
Speakers A: Enjoy up to 7.1-channel surround-sound playback (see page 23).
You can enjoy the various listening modes, such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (see pages 79–86).
*While Powered Zone 2 is being used, or Speakers B is used, playback is reduced to 5.1-channels (see page 119).
Speakers B: Use a pair for stereo speakers for serious music listening (see page 23).
Zone 2: Enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback in a second room (see page 119).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required if Speakers B is used.
Zone 3: Enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in a third room (see page 120).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.
Main Room: Speakers A and Speakers B
Front Speakers B
Surround back left and right
speakers
Front Speakers A
While Powered Zone 2 is being
used, nothing is output by these
speakers (page 121). Cannot
be used if Speakers B is used.
Subwoofer
Center speaker
*
Surround left and right speakers
*
Can be used with Speakers A,
Speakers B, or both.
*
Zone 2 Room
Zone 3 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
Left and right
stereo speakers
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver
Front Panel
Not North American model
3
1 2 456
7
8 9
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
Push here to open
the flap
Front flap
J
K
L
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
A STANDBY/ON button (50)
I MASTER VOLUME control (68)
Sets the volume of the AV receiver to –∞ dB,
–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative dis-
play).
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby.
B STANDBY indicator (50)
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
flashes while a signal is being received from the
remote controller.
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-
lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 106.
Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indica-
tor lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing
this button again selects the previous listening
mode.
C READY indicator (109)
North American model doesn’t have this indicator.
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
HDMI Power Control is enabled.
D ZONE 2 indicator (123)
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 2 is on.
K AUDIO SEL button (78)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
E ZONE 3 indicator (123)
Flashes when Zone 3 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 3 is on.
L Input selector buttons (68)
Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO, NET/USB.
Receives control signals from the remote controller.
G Display
See “Display” on page 11.
H DISPLAY button (77)
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
North American model
M
N OP Q RS TUV W X Y Z a
b
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
AUX
2
INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES
DIMMER MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
PRESET
CLEAR
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
ENTER
TUNING
c d e
Other models
f
T
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
AUX
2
INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL
3
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
ENTER
TUNING
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
M PHONES jack (77)
V TUNING MODE button (69)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM
and FM radio.
N ZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (123)
W SETUP button
The ZONE 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.
Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which
are displayed on the connected TV.
The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.
The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
buttons
When AM or FM is selected, the TUNING [
]
O LEVEL button (124)
Zone 3.
[
] buttons are used for radio tuning, and the PRE-
SET [ ] [ ] buttons are used to select radio pre-
sets (see page 73). With the onscreen setup menus,
they work as arrow buttons and are used to select
and set items. The ENTER button is also used with
the onscreen setup menus.
P TONE button (124)
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble).
Q HDMI OUT button (54)
Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting.
Y RETURN button
R STEREO button (79)
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
menu.
Selects the Stereo listening mode.
S THX button (79)
Z USB port
Selects the THX listening modes.
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files (MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A) can be plugged in here and the
Adjusts the display brightness.
On models other than the North American model,
this is the RT/PTY/TP button, and it’s used with
RDS (Radio Data System). See “Using RDS” on
page 71.
a SETUP MIC (61)
The automatic speaker setup microphone connects
here.
b AUX 2 INPUT (45, 87)
U MEMORY button (73)
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
c Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons (90, 124)
Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance
of Zone 2 and Zone 3.
e LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons (79)
Select the Onkyo original listening modes.
f POWER switch (50)
d DIGITAL INPUT button (59)
American models do not have this switch.
Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.
This is the main power switch. When set to OFF, the
AV receiver is completely shutdown. It must be set
to ON to set the AV receiver to On or Standby.
Display
12345
6 7
8 9
0
A B C
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
1Speaker/channel indicators (84)
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels
used by the current input source.
6Tuning indicators (69)
HD (North American model only) (74): Lights
up if the current AM or FM station supports HD
Radio technology.
–
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for
speakers that are set to No or None.
SPS (North American model only) (75):
transmitting secondary multicast channels.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are included in the current input signal.
RDS (71): Lights up when tuned to a radio station
– FL: Front left
– C: Center
AUTO (69): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is
ual Tuning mode is selected.
– FR: Front right
– SL: Surround left
– LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
– SR: Surround right
– SBL: Surround back left
– SB: Surround back
– SBR: Surround back right
TUNED (69): Lights up when tuned to a radio sta-
tion.
FM STEREO (69): Lights up when tuned to a ste-
reo FM station.
2BTL indicator (51)
7SLEEP indicator (77)
Lights up when the Speaker Type setting is set to
BTL for bridged front speaker operation.
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.
8Audyssey indicator (61)
3A and B indicators (68)
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.
Indicate which speaker set is selected: A or B.
9Headphone indicator (77)
Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged
into the PHONES jack.
4ZONE 2 indicator (123)
Lights up when Powered Zone 2 is being used.
5Listening mode and format indicators (79)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.
0Message area
Displays various information.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
AAudio input indicators (74, 78)
BVolume level (68)
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
Displays the volume level.
CMUTING indicator (76)
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an
analog HD Radio transmission is being received,
the ANALOG indicator lights up.
Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.
Rear Panel
North American model only
North American model
only
78
P
Not North American model
1 2 3 4
5 6
9 J KLM N O
Q
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
RS232
MAIN
HD RADIO
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
3
2
AM
Y
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
ANTENNA
V
IN
AC OUTLET
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
FM
75
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
MULTI CH
PRE OUT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
SURR L
FRONT L
OUT
(BTL)
(BTL)
FRONT R
FRONT
L
R S T
U V W X YZ ab c
g
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 56.
A
REMOTE CONTROL
This
(Remote Interactive) jack can be con-
nected to the
jack on another
-capable
E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
This RCA component video output is for connect-
ing a TV or projector with a component video input.
Onkyo component for remote and system control.
To use , you must make an analog audio connec-
tion (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other
component, even if they are connected digitally.
F HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-
nections carry digital audio and digital video.
B RS232
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to home
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI
Input Setup” on page 54.
automation equipment and external controllers.
C PHONO IN
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.
D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3
These RCA component video inputs are for con-
necting components with a component video output,
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (dig-
ital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-
jector with an HDMI input.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
G SIRIUS antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS
instructions).
S DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT
components with an optical digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 58.
H XM antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately (see the separate XM
instructions).
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as
a CD recorder.
I MONITOR OUT
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
T GND screw
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.
J AM ANTENNA (not North American model)
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna.
U CD IN
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.
K ZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
V TAPE IN/OUT
These analog audio input and output jacks are for
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input
and output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder,
etc.
L FM ANTENNA (not North American model)
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.
M IR IN/OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-
nected to the IR IN jack, allowing you to control the
AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or control it
when it’s out of sight, for example, installed in a
cabinet.
W AUX 1 IN
A VCR for playback only or other video source can
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.
X GAME/TV IN
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal.
N 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2
Y CBL/SAT IN
This output can be connected to the 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2. When Zone 2 is
turned on, a 12-volt trigger signal is output.
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks
for connecting the video signal.
O ETHERNET port
Z VCR/DVR IN/OUT
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to your
Ethernet network (e.g., router or switch) for playing
music files on a networked computer or media
server, or for listening to Internet radio.
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be
connected here for recording and playback. There’s
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks
for connecting the video signal.
P AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio) (on North
American model)
a DVD IN
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s
S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-
necting the video signal.
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM
antenna.
b FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR
BACK L/R SPEAKERS
Q AC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.
These terminal posts are for connecting the front
Speakers A, center, surround, and surround back
speakers.
R DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 58.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front Speakers A and sur-
round back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp
or bridge front Speakers A. See “Bi-amping Front
Speakers A” and “Bridging Front Speakers A” on
page 28.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
c MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
d PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUB-
WOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-
channel power amplifier for when you want to use
the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUB-
WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-
woofer.
e PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
f ZONE 2 L/R SPEAKERS
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front Speakers B and sur-
round back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp
or bridge front Speakers B. See “Bi-amping Front
Speakers A” and “Bridging Front Speakers A” on
page 28.
g AC OUTLET (North American and European
models only)
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
power to other AV components. The type and num-
ber of outlets depends on the country in which you
purchased your AV receiver.
See pages 22–49 for hookup information.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries
Using the Remote Controller
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide open the cover.
1
Remote control sensor
STANDBY indicator
AV receiver
30˚
30˚
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.
2
Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)
Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sun-
light or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in
mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-
ler may not work reliably.
Slide the cover shut.
3
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obsta-
cle between it and the AV receiver’s remote control
sensor.
Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
About the Remote Controller Modes
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote
controller to control your other AV components. The
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
using the REMOTE MODE buttons.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control the AV
receiver. It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette
recorder connected via
.
To set the remote controller to RECEIVER/TAPE
mode, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button.
■ RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV
receiver and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via
.
A
ON
STANDBY
TV
■ DVD Mode
INPUT
B
C
By default, you can control an Onkyo DVD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control components made by other manufactur-
ers (see page 126).
L
M
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
■ CD/CDR/MD Mode
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 126).
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
11
12
D
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
■ DOCK Mode
RECEIVER
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
N
O
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
code first (see page 126).
TAPE/AMP
DIMMER
5
F
+
■ TV and VCR Modes
CH
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You
page 126).
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
G
P
-
H
I
Q
R
PREV
CH
■ CABLE/SAT Mode
DISPLAY
MUTING
In CABLE/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satel-
lite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote
control code first (see page 126).
1
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
■ NET/USB Mode
SP A
SP B
S
LISTENING MODE
SURR
computer, media server, or USB mass storage device, or
for listening to Internet radio.
STEREO
J
K
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
■ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see
page 122).
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
T
U
VCR
RC-687
M
V
Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select
1
a mode.
Use the buttons supported by that mode
to control the component.
Note:
2
• Some of the remote controller functions described in
this manual may not work as expected with other com-
ponents.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode: see right column
DVD mode: see page 18
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 19
DOCK mode: see page 20
NET/USB mode: see page 21
TV, VCR, CABLE/SAT modes: see page 128
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T Re-EQ button (89)
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.
A STANDBY button (50)
U L NIGHT button (89)
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.
Turns the Late Night function on or off.
B ON button (50)
V AUDIO SEL button (78)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
Turns on the AV receiver.
Used to select the input source.
D MACRO buttons (130)
Used with the Macro function.
■ TAPE mode
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
E DIMMER button (76)
1Previous and Next [
The Previous [ ] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
]/[
] buttons
Adjusts the display brightness.
F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used to select and adjust settings.
the current track. The Next [
next track.
] button selects the
G CH +/– button (73)
Selects radio presets.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons may not work prop-
H SETUP button
Used to change settings.
erly with some cassette tapes.
I DISPLAY button (77)
Play [ ] button
Starts playback.
Displays information about the current input source.
J LISTENING MODE buttons (79)
Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons
The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast
Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.
Used to select the listening modes. The [STEREO],
[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] but-
tons can be used at any time, regardless of the cur-
rently selected remote controller mode.
Reverse Play [ ] button
Starts reverse playback.
K TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+
buttons (76, 99)
Stop [ ] button
Stops playback.
REC [ ] button
Starts recording.
L LIGHT button
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on
or off.
M D.TUN button (70)
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.
N REMOTE MODE buttons (16)
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
the currently selected mode lights up.
O SLEEP button (77)
Used with the Sleep function.
P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (68)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of
Q RETURN button
Returns to the previous display when changing set-
tings.
R MUTING button (76)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
S SP A and SP B buttons (8, 23)
Used to select Speakers A or Speakers B.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button
DVD Mode
Sets the DVD player to Standby.
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the
[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.
B ON button
Turns on the DVD player.
C Number buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points.
D TOP MENU button
Selects a DVD’s top menu.
A
E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
ON
STANDBY
TV
Used to navigate menus and select items.
B
C
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
F DISC +/– button
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
Selects discs on a DVD changer.
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
G SETUP button
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
H DISPLAY button
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
11
12
Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.
M
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
I Playback buttons
CDR/MD/DOCK
DVD
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow
Forward.
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
D
E
DIMMER
N
J REPEAT button
+
Used with the repeat playback function.
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
F
K AUDIO button
-
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
O
G
H
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
L OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button
Opens and closes the disc tray.
I
M CLEAR button
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
P
SP A
SP B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
N MENU button
STEREO
Displays a DVD’s menu.
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
J
K
Q
R
O RETURN button
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
P RANDOM button
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
L
VCR
Used with the random playback function.
S
RC-687
M
Q PLAY MODE button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
R SUBTITLE button
Selects subtitles.
S VIDEO OFF button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button
CD/MD/CDR Modes
Sets the component to Standby.
To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by
another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE
troller mode.
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code
(see page 126).
B ON button
Set the component to On or Standby.
C Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points.
D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used with some components.
E DISC +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.
F DISPLAY button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.
A
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
B
C
G Playback buttons
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
H REC [ ] button
Starts recording.
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
11
12
I REPEAT button
K
Used with the repeat playback function.
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
J OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button
REMOTE MODE
CD
CD
DVD
VCR
ZONE
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.
CDR/MD/DOCK
CDR/MD/K
NET/USB
TV
CABLE
SAT
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
K CLEAR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
DIMMER
L RETURN button
D
E
Used with some components.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
M RANDOM button
Used with the random playback function.
-
PREV
CH
N PLAY MODE button
F
7
8
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
DISPLAY
MUTING
L
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
M
N
SP A
SP B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
9
J
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF S. RESTORE
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-687
M
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button
DOCK Mode
Turns off the iPod.
Dock mode is for controlling anApple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock.
B ON button*
Turns on the iPod.
To control an RI Dock, press the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button to select the DOCK remote controller
mode.
In order to control an RI Dock, you must first enter the
appropriate remote control code (see page 126).
C TOP MENU button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons*
Used to navigate menus and select items.
When Using an RI Dock:
E ALBUM +/– button*
IN L/R jacks.
Selects the next or previous album.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or
HDD/DOCK.
F DISPLAY button*
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see
page 57).
G Previous [
] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
H Pause [ ] button
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
works as a Play/Pause button.)
A
I Rewind [ ] button
ON
STANDBY
TV
Press and hold to rewind.
INPUT
B
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
J PLAYLIST [ ]/[ ] buttons*
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
iPod.
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
K REPEAT button*
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
NET/USB
Used with the repeat function.
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
L MENU button*
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
Used to access menus.
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
CD
M Play [ ] button
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DK
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
button works as a Play/Pause button.)
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
NET/USB
DIMMER
C
4
N Next [
] button
L
Selects the next song.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
O Stop [ ] button
DISC
ALBUM
5
6
Stops playback and displays a menu.
-
PREV
CH
P Fast Forward [ ] button
M
Press and hold to fast forward.
DISPLAY
MUTING
N
O
P
Q
7
8
Q RANDOM button*
Used with the shuffle function.
9
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
R PLAY MODE button
Used to select play modes on components with
selectable play modes.
SP A
SP B
J
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
K
R
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by 3rd generation iPods.
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-687
M
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A Number buttons
NET/USB Mode
Used to enter track numbers.
NET/USB mode is for playing music files on a net-
worked computer, media server, or USB mass storage
device, or for listening to Internet radio.
B Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
C CH +/– button
To set the remote controller to NET/USB mode, press
the [NET/USB] REMOTE MODE button.
Used to select Internet radio stations.
D SETUP button
Displays the URL input screen for Internet radio.
E Previous [
] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
F Pause [ ] button
Pauses playback of music stored on a USB mass
storage device.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
G REPEAT button
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
1
Used with the repeat playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
H RETURN button
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
Returns to the previous display.
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
I Play [ ] button
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
Starts playback.
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
J Next [
] button
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB
NET/USB
Selects the next song.
TV
CABLE
SAT
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
K Stop [ ] button
Stops playback.
2
+
L RANDOM button
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Used with the random playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.
3
4
-
8
PREV
CH
9
DISPLAY
MUTING
5
6
J
K
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
L
SP A
SP B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
7
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-687
M
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise
sound positioning and to add realistic
ambience.
Front left and right speakers
These output the main sound.Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.
Position them at the sides of the lis-
tener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally
they should be equally spaced from the
listener.
Center speaker
This speaker enhances the front left
and right speakers, making sound
movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to yourTV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.
The volume and quality of the bass output
from your subwoofer will depend on its posi-
tion, the shape of your listening room, and
your listening position.In general, a good bass
sound can be obtained by installing the sub-
woofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way
along the front wall, as shown.
Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-
tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.
Tip: To find the best position for your sub-
woofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the
room and choose the
one that provides
the most satisfying
results.
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
ConnectingYour Speakers
About Speakers A and Speakers B
Speakers A and Speakers B allows you to have two speaker configurations of up to 5.1 speakers. (Speakers B cannot be
used if Speakers A is used for 7.1-channel playback.) Each configuration has its own pair of stereo front speakers and
can use the same subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back speakers, as required. You could, for example, use
Speakers A when watching a DVD movie with surround sound (5.1-channels) and use Speakers B for serious music
listening with a pair of stereo speakers and the subwoofer (2.1-channels).
Speakers A and Speakers B are set in the “Speaker Settings” on page 51 and configured in the Speaker Configuration
on page 94.
Front Speakers A and front Speakers B can be wired normally, bi-amped, or bridged, but A and B cannot be bi-amped
or bridged at the same time. For example, if front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B can only be wired normally.
Similarly, if front Speakers B are bi-amped, Speakers A can only be wired normally. See pages 27–30 for more infor-
mation.
The Speakers A and Speakers B configurations are selected by using the [SP A] and [SP B] buttons on the remote
controller. Only one configuration can be selected at a time.
The versatility offered by the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations means you can configure the AV receiver to
suit your exact requirements and application. Two typical applications are shown below.
■ 5.1-channel Playback with Speakers A and
Stereo Playback with Speakers B
■ 5.1-channel Playback with Bridged Front
Speakers
In this example, Speakers A provides 5.1-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is used for serious music listening with a
pair of top-quality stereo speakers.
In this example, Speakers A provides 5.1-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies and the
front speakers are bridged (BTL) for greater power.
Speakers B is not used.
Speakers B
FL
FR
C
FL
FR
FL
C
FR
Speakers A
Speakers A
SL
SR
SL
SR
2-1.Speaker Settings
2-1.Speaker Settings
Speaker Impedance
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)
6ohms
BTL
Not Use
Speaker Impedance
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)
6ohms
Normal
Normal
2-2.Speaker Config
Speakers A
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Use
Use
Use
Use
Surr Back
Not Use
2-2.Speaker Config
Speakers B
Subwoofer
Front
Not Use
Use
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Speaker Configuration
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer
For 7.1-channel surround-sound playback, you need
seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s SUB-
WOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered sub-
woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.
The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.
Number of speakers:
Front left
2
3
4
5
6
7
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
Powered
subwoofer
ANTENNA
Front right
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
MONITOR
3
2
OUT
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
Center
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
C
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
Surround left
✓
✓
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE
SU
PHONO
LINE INPUT
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ASSIGNABLE
Surround right
Surround back*
Surround back left
Surround back right
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
✓
✓
LINE INPUT
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SURR BACK L terminals.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-
cally (see page 61) or manually (see page 94).
Using Dipole Speakers
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.
Normal speakers
Dipole speakers
1
1
TV/screen
TV/screen
4
2
3
4
2
3
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Speaker Connection Precautions
Attaching the Speaker Labels
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)
speaker terminals are all black.)
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6,
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see
page 51). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may
be activated.
Speaker terminal
Front left, Zone 2 left
Front right, Zone 2 right
Center
Color
White
Red
Green
Blue
Surround left
Surround right
Gray
Brown
Tan
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
Surround back left
Surround back right
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
speaker cable in accordance with the above table.All you
need to do then is to match the color of each label to the
corresponding speaker terminal.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) termi-
nals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the
positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV
receiver.
Connecting the Speaker Cables
• Don’t connect more than one
cable to each speaker termi-
nal. Doing so may damage the
AV receiver.
Strip about 5/8" (15
5/8" (15 mm)
1
mm) of insulation from
the ends of the
• Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.
speaker cables, and
twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
Unscrew the terminal.
2
Fully insert the bare wire.
3
Screw the terminal tight.
4
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
■ 7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for 7.1-channel playback
with Speakers A.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front right speaker
Center speaker
Front left speaker
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
L
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
FRONT R
SURR R
CENTER
SURR L
FRONT L
Bi-AMP
Surround back
right speaker
Surround right
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker
■ 5.1-channel Playback with Speakers A or Speakers B
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for up to 5.1-channel
playback with Speakers A or Speakers B.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front right
speaker A
Front left
speaker A
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
Center speaker
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
MONITOR
3
2
OUT
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
C
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
L
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT R
SURR R
CENTER
SURR L
FRONT L
Front right
speaker B
Surround right
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Front left
speaker B
Notes:
• When SpeakersA is selected, the front left speakerA and front right speakerA become the main front speakers. When
Speakers B is selected, the front left speaker B and front right speaker B become the main front speakers.
• Speakers A and Speakers B are set in the configured in the Speaker Configuration on page 94.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping Front Speakers A
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front Speakers A and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for front SpeakersA, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-
2
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts con-
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
speakers’ woofer terminals.
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal to
the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
minal.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type Front A setting to Bi-Amp to
enable bi-amping (see page 51).
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
3
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
• When front SpeakersA are biamped, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-
4
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
minal.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8 ohms
or higher for bi-amping. Failure to do so may seriously
damage the AV receiver.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
IN
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
(BTL)
(BTL)
FRONT
R
FRONT
L
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
FRONT R
FRONT L
(BTL)
FRONT R
(BTL)
FRONT L
Woofer (low)
Tweeter (high)
Right speaker
Left speaker
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging Front Speakers A
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
2
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
not.
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type Front A setting to BTL to enable
bridging (see page 51).
• When front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
(BTL)
(BT)
FRONT
R
FRONT
L
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
FRONT R
FRONT L
(BTL)
FRONT R
(BTL)
FRONT L
Right speaker
Left speaker
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping Front Speakers B
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front Speakers B and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for front Speakers B, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-
2
• For bi-amping, the ZONE 2 L/R terminal posts con-
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
speakers’ woofer terminals.
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal to
the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
minal.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type Front B setting to Bi-Amp to
enable bi-amping (see page 51).
Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 L positive (+)
3
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
• When front Speakers B are biamped, front SpeakersA
must be wired normally.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-
4
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
minal.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8 ohms
or higher for bi-amping. Failure to do so may seriously
damage the AV receiver.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
IN
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
(BTL)
(BTL)
FRONT
R
FRONT
L
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT R
FRONT L
Woofer (low)
Tweeter (high)
Right speaker
Left speaker
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging Front Speakers B
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 L positive (+)
2
• For bridging, the positive (+) ZONE 2 L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
not.
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type Front B setting to BTL to enable
bridging (see page 51).
• When front Speakers B are bridged, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OUT ZONE
2
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
(BTL)
(BTL)
FRONT
R
FRONT
L
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE2 L
FRONT R
FRONT L
ASSIGNABLE
Right speaker
Left speaker
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Antennas
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.
2
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna
to use the tuner.
■ North American Model
Thumbtacks, etc.
AM antenna push terminals
HD RADIO
AM
ANTENNA
FM
75
when using thumbtacks.
FM antenna jack
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead (see page 32).
■ Other Models
AM antenna push terminals
ANTENNA
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
AM
FM75
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
1
FM antenna jack
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
1
2
■ American Model
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around).
FM75
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
■ Other Models
■ North American Model
FM75
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Push
Insert wire
Release
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Antennas—Continued
■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.
■ Other Models
3
Push
Insert wire
Release
TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV receiver
To TV (or VCR)
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of theAM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoorAM antenna can be used in
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
cords.
■ North American Model
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 32).
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead.
■ Other Models
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
FM 75
Notes:
OutdoorAM antennas work best when installed horizon-
tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-
ards.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components
AV Connection Color Coding
About AV Connections
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.
Optical Digital Jacks
Analog audio
Left (white)
Right (red)
Left (white)
Right (red)
The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Composite video
(Yellow)
(Yellow)
Right!
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical
plug straight when inserting and removing.
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connec-
tions can cause noise or malfunc-
tions).
• To prevent interference, keep
audio and video cables away from
power cords and speaker cables.
Wrong!
AV Cables and Jacks
Video
Cable
Jack
Description
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
HDMI
HDMI
Y
P
P
Y
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
component video jacks slightly differently.)
Y
Component
video cable
B
R
P
B
R
C
C
B/PB
P
R/PR
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals
and provides better picture quality than composite
video.
S
S-Video cable
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.
Composite
video cable
V
Audio
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for coaxial.
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
Optical digital
audio cable
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for optical.
Coaxial digital
audio cable
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most
common connection format for analog audio and
can be found on virtually all AV components.
L
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
R
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-
channel analog audio output. Several standard
analog audio cables can be used instead of a multi-
channel cable.
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Receiver
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV receiver, you
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV receiver.
: Signal Flow
Video
Video
Audio
Audio
TV, projector,
etc.
DVD player, etc.
Speakers (see page 26 for hookup details)
Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.
Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI out-
puts.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Main or Sub
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Main or
Sub (see page 52), video input signals flow
through the AV receiver as shown, with com-
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
posite video, S-Video, and component video
sources all being upconverted for the respec-
tive HDMI output. Use the Main or Sub set-
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
ting if you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI
OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, respec-
tively, to your TV.
IN
AV receiver
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see
page 52), video input signals flow through the
AV receiver as shown, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output. Use this setting if
you connect the AV receiver’s COMPO-
NENT VIDEO OUT to your TV.
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
HDMI
IN
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
video. Note that these conversions only apply
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Composite
Component
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
This signal flow also applies when the Monitor
Out Resolution setting is set to Through (see
page 52).
TV, projector, etc.
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting
When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No
(see page 52), if the Monitor Out Resolution
setting is set to anything other than Through
(see page 52), the video signal flow will be as
shown here, with composite video and S-Video
sources being upconverted for the component
video output.
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input
signals are not output.
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
TV, projector, etc.
Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
receiver by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV receiver does not convert dig-
ital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.
HDMI
Optical Coaxial Analog Multichannel
AV receiver
HDMI
Optical
Analog
1
2
Depends on the HDMI Audio Out setting (see page 109).
Only the front L/R channels are output.
*
*
MD recorder, etc.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a TV or Projector
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
TV
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT S
Component video input
S-Video input
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
MONITOR OUT V
Composite video input
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
GAME/TV IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
RS232
ANTENNA
AM
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
OUT
Y
C
B
MONITOR
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
OUT
V
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
b
c
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
(BTL)
FRONT R
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Connect one
or the other
TV, projector,
etc.
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see
pages 39 and 41).
Hint!
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a DVD player
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection
.
a
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
DVD player
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1
DVD IN S
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
DVD IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
DVD IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
RS232
ANTENNA
AM
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
OUT
Y
MONITOR
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
OUT
C
B
V
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
V
CONTROL
b
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
S
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
c
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2 R
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ASSIGNABLE
A
(BTL)
FRONT R
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
DVD player
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a
multichannel analog audio output, see page 38.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH FRONT
DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the AV receiver’s
SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 60. To
select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 78. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 109.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
F
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
7.1 ch
5.1 ch
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
L
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
ASSIGNABLE
R
R
SUBWOOFER
OUT
MULTI CH
(BTL)
FRONT
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
FRONT
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
SURR
BACK
DVD player
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR (
,
, or ), and then make the connection. If you use
A
B
C
connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and
b
c
a
, or and .)
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2
VCR/DVR IN S
Signal flow
VCR or DVR
Picture quality
Best
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
VCR/DVR IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
VCR/DVR IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
ANTENNA
AM
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
OUT
Y
MONITOR
C
B
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
V
VCR/DVR
IR
OUT
V
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
S
R/PR
S
OUT
b
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
c
A
(BTL)
FRONT R
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
VCR or DVR
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection. The video
A
B
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
Connection
AV receiver
VCR/DVR OUT S
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
Picture quality
Better
S-Video input
Composite video input
Audio L/R input
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
A
B
a
VCR/DVR OUT V
Standard
VCR/DVR OUT L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Digital optical input
b
RS232
ANTENNA
AM
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
OUT
Y
MONITOR
B
A
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
OUT
V
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
b
(BTL)
FRONT R
L
R
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
IN
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
VCR or DVR
Notes:
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUTV jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via theVCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Video source
Component video output
S-Video output
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
CBL/SAT IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
CBL/SAT IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
CBL/SAT IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
b
c
RS232
ANTENNA
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
Y
MONITOR
OUT
C
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
V
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
b
c
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
(BTL)
FRONT R
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, or multichannel PCM).
*1
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components will
display a picture.
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Mas-
ter Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.
About Copyright Protection
*2
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,
projector, and so on.
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 54.
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI MAIN OUT and SUB OUT for
display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI outputs.
See “Video Connection Formats” on page 34 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see
page 109).
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio
Hint!
Out setting to On (see page 109), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV
receiver's speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.
Note:
• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see page 109), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening
through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV
receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s set-
tings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
TV
DVD player
HDMI
HDMI
IN 1
OUT
MAIN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
OUT
Y
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
V
IN
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SUR
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
(BTL)
FRONT R
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
a
and .)
b
Connection
AV receiver
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
GAME/TV IN S
Signal flow
Game console
Component video output
S-Video output
Picture quality
Best
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
GAME/TV IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Standard
GAME/TV IN L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
RS232
ANTENNA
AM
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
OUT
Y
MONITOR
C
B
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
V
VCR/DVR
IR
OUT
V
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
S
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
b
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2 R
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ASSIGNABLE
(BTL)
FRONT R
A
L
R
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Game Console
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
MASTER VOLUME
INPUT
b
a
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
DIGITAL
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
DIMMER MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
VIDE
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
L
AUDIO
INPUT
R
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
S VIDEO
A
B
VIDEO
OUT
L
AUDIO
OUT
R
S VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Camcorder, etc.
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Camcorder
AUX 2 INPUT S VIDEO
AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO
AUX 2 INPUT L/R
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
a
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output
AUX 2 INPUT DIGITAL
b
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a CD Player
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
a
ASSIGNABLE
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
IN
3
IN
2
IN 1(DVD)
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
COAXIAL
IN 2
b
c
V
IN
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
L
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
R
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
CD
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
OPTICAL
IN 2
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
(BTL)
FRONT
R
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
Connect one or the other
CD player
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
b
c
use and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
CD
CD IN L/R
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
⇐
⇐
⇐
a
b
c
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
Connecting a Turntable
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-
table.
ANTENNA
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
F
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
C
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
Notes:
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
IN
FRONT
R
R
ASSIGNABLE
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, con-
necting the ground wire may produce an audible hum.
If this happens, disconnect it.
OUT
L
(BTL)
FRONT
R
R
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV
receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.
PHONO
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-
table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.
R
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder (
,
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
d
IN
a
COAXIAL
b
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
L
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 2
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
R
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IN
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
V
S
S
TAPE
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
c
OPTICAL
(DVD)
R/PR
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
a
IN 2
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
L
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
URR
R
SURR
ASSIGNABLE
R
OPTICAL
d
OUT
TAPE
L
R
L
R
Connect one
or the other
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
OUT
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and
.
a
b
a
c
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection
.
d
Connection
a
AV receiver
Signal flow
Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder
⇐
⇒
TAPE IN L/R
TAPE OUT L/R
Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Digital optical input
⇐
⇐
⇒
b
c
d
Connecting a Power Amplifier
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and
use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp
to the PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the
subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered
subwoofer, connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER jack.
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
IN
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
(BTL)
)
FRONT
R
SURRBACK
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
1. Subwoofer
6. Surround right speaker
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FRONT
CENTER
SR
SURR BACK
SUBWOOFER
Power amplifier
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting an RI Dock
■ IfYour iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and connect
its video output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV
IN V jack.
■ IfYour iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
IN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
L
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
MONITOR
OUT
3
2
R
GAME/TV
HDMI
Y
ASSIGNABLE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
GAME/TV
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
IIN IN 1(DVD)
MONITOR
2
IN
1
OUT
(DVD)
CR/PR
Y
IN
IN
OT
IN
IN
IN
IN
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
REMOTE
C
B/PB
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
(CBL/SAT)
DIGITAL
R
R
IN
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
OPTICAL
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
L
(VCR/DVR)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT
R
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OUT
OPTICAL
R
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
FRONT
R
(BTL)
ZONE2
R
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT
R
GAME/TV
OUT
(BTL)
FRONT
R
If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock, connect its video
output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN S jack.
Notes:
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV receiver’s remote controller for the first time (see
page 127).
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an
cable (see page 49).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 57).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American and
European models only)
The AV receiver has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be
AC INLET
used to connect the power cords of other components that you
intend to use with the AV receiver. These components can
then be left turned on so that they turn on and off as and when
the AV receiver is set to On or Standby.
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
Caution:
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that
you connect to the AC OUTLETS does not exceed the
AC OUTLET
stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL 120 W).
Notes:
• Onkyo components connected via
nected directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the
AV receiver.
should be con-
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
50/60Hz
SWITCHED
100W 0.45-0.41A MAX.
AC 220-240V
120W 1A MAX.
• The number of AC OUTLETS, socket type, and total
capacity depends on the country in which you purchased
the AV receiver.
European model
American model
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Onkyo
Components
Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable (RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary connections (see illustration below).
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 57).
With
(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:
Auto Power On/Standby
When you start playback on a component connected via
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components
connected via will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC
, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn
OUTLET on the AV receiver.
Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected via
, the AV receiver automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 78), as the Direct Change
tion selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.
func-
Remote Control
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other
-capable Onkyo components. You must enter
the appropriate remote control code first (see page 127). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV receiver
and not the other component.
Notes:
IN
• Use only
are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).
• Some components have two jacks. You can con-
nect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is
for connecting additional -capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to jacks. Con-
cables for
connections.
cables
L
R
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
CD
ANTENNA
ASSIGNABLE
AM
FM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
MONITOR
3
2
OUT
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
FRONT
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
VCR/DVR)
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
REMOTE
CONTROL
FRONT
R
R
SURR
ASSIGNABLE
R
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
necting other manufacturer’s components may cause
a malfunction.
DVD
• Some components may not support all
functions.
e.g., CD player
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo
components.
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
e.g., DVD player
On/Standby and Direct Change
work.
functions do not
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
Connecting the Power Cord
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
• Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On the AV Receiver
• North American model
• Other models
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
ON
STANDBY
TV
STANDBY indicator
STANDBY indicator
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SA
0
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
PHONES
PHONES
POWER
ON
OFF
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
RECEIVER
CABLE
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
POWER
Turning On and Standby
POWER
Set the [POWER] switch to the ON position ( ).
(Skip this step if you have the North American model.)
1
The AV receiver enters Standby mode, and the STANDBY indicator comes on.
ON
OFF
On the AV receiver, press the [STANDBY/ON] button.
2
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,
followed by the [ON] button.
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes off.
STANDBY/ON
RECEIVER
or
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components con-
nected via
.
ON
To turn the AV receiver off, press the [STANDBY/ON] button, or press the remote
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume
before you turn it off.
For non-North American models: To completely shut down the AV receiver, set the [POWER] switch to the OFF
position ( ).
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 61.
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 52.
■ Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,
Y
HDMI
component video input, or digital audio input?
COAXIAL
PB
Input Setup” on page 56, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 58 respec-
PR
OPTICAL
tively.
■ Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI
OUT
IN
Dock?
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 57.
TAPE
MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.
Speaker Settings
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select“1. Speaker Set-
tings,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Settings menu appears.
If you change these settings, you must run the auto-
ENTER
matic speaker setup again (see page 61).
2-1.Speaker Settings
Speaker Impedance
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)
6ohms
Normal
Not use
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
ENTER
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 6
2–5
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Speaker
]
-
4
5
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Impedance,”and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
4 ohms: Select if the impedance of any
speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6.
6 ohms: Select if the impedances of all
speakers are between 6 and
16 ohms.
ENTER
RANDOM
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6, set the Speaker Impedance to 4 ohms.
To use bi-amping or bridging, you must change the
Speaker Type setting. For hookup information, see pages
27–30.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Front (Speaker
A),” and use the Left and Right
]
Notes:
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
up to 2.1 speakers in the main room.
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
Normal: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front Speakers A
normally.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-
ume.
Bi-Amp:Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front Speakers A
for bi-amped operation.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
BTL: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front Speakers A
for bridged operation. The
BTL indicator will appear on
the display.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Note:
• Bi-Amp and BTL cannot be selected
if Front (Speaker B) is set to Bi-Amp
or BTL.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
2
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
ENTER
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
HDMI Monitor Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Front (Speaker
B),” and use the Left and Right
]
6
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
NotUse: Select this if you’re not using
Speakers B.
Normal: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front Speakers B
normally.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
Bi-Amp:Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front Speakers B
for bi-amped operation.
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
11
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
BTL: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front Speakers B
for bridged operation. The
BTL indicator will appear on
the display.
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 6
2–5
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
Note:
PREV
CH
• Bi-Amp and BTL cannot be selected
if Front (SpeakerA) is set to Bi-Amp
or BTL.
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SP
A
SP
B
7
NING MODE
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No so that the
onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite
video and S-Video sources are upconverted and output
by the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI Monitor setting to
Main or Sub, respectively, so that the onscreen setup
menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources are upconverted and output by
the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT and have the AV
receiver upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to
match the resolution supported by your TV.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Resolution,”
and use the Left and Right
]
2
5
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
ENTER
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
Through:Select this to pass video
through the AV receiver at the
same resolution and with no
conversion.
ENTER
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically con-
vert video at resolutions not
supported by your TV.
480p: Select this for 480p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary. (Not available when
the HDMI Monitor setting is
set to No.)
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “1. Monitor
Out,” and then press [ENTER].
]
3
4
ENTER
The Monitor Out menu appears.
1-1.Monitor Out
720p: Select this for 720p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary. (Not available when
the HDMI Monitor setting is
set to No.)
HDMI Monitor
Resolution Through
Main
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“HDMI Monitor,”
and use the Left and Right
]
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S
MONITOR OUT, or V MON-
ITOR OUT.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
6
ENTER
Main: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
Sub: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
Notes:
• See page 35 for charts showing how the HDMI Moni-
tor and Resolution settings affect the video signal flow
through the AV receiver.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the AV
receiver’s [HDMI OUT] button so
that “HDMI Monitor: No”
appears on the display.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Using the HDMI OUT Button
HDMI Input Setup
The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No, Main,
or Sub by using the [HDMI OUT] button on the AV
receiver.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1, 2
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
MASTER VOLUME
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
STANDBY/ON
TV VOL
STANDBY
READY
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
REMOTE MODE
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
DVD
VCR
CD
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
Press the [HDMI OUT] button.
The current setting is displayed.
1
PREV
CH
HDMI OUT
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
NING MODE
Press the [HDMI OUT] button
repeatedly to select:
No: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S
MONITOR OUT, or V MON-
ITOR OUT.
Main: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
2
HDMI OUT
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO.
Sub: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that com-
posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are
upconverted ( ) and output by the HDMI outputs. You
can set this for each input selector by selecting the
“- - -” option.
Note:
*
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the
[HDMI OUT] button to select No.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
HDMI
IN
( )
*
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Notes:
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
input selector.
RECEIVER
• For composite video, S-Video, and component video
upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI
OUT SUB, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to
Main or Sub, respectively (see page 52). See page 34
version.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the digital audio input for that input
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 58.
2
3
4
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
ENTER
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“2. HDMI Input,”
and then press [ENTER].
]
ENTER
The HDMI Input menu appears.
1-2.HDMI Input
DVD
---
---
---
---
---
---
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
ENTER
AUX2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and use the Left and Right
]
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 3.
IN4: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 4.
- - -: Select this to upconvert and
output composite video,
ENTER
S-Video, and component
video sources from the HDMI
outputs.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Input Setup
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
2
RECEIVER
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ENTER
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 5
ENTER
2–4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select “3. Component
Video Input,” and then press
[ENTER].
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
ENTER
SP
A
SP
B
ENING MODE
The Component Video Input menu
appears.
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.
1-3.Component Video Input
ENTER
DVD
IN1
---
---
---
---
---
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-
tors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2, TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO) are assigned to
the “- - -” option.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and use the Left and Right
]
4
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
verted ( ) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT.You can set this for each input selector by selecting
the “- - -” option.
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 1.
*
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 2.
Composite video, S-Video
IN
Component video
ENTER
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 3.
- - -: Select to output composite
video and S-Video sources
from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT.
( )
*
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Input Display
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for
to work properly, you must change this setting.
Notes:
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, the HDMI Mon-
itor setting must be set to No (see page 52). See
page 34 for more information on video signal flow and
upconversion.
1, 2
1, 2
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
Press the [TAPE] or [GAME/TV]
input selector button so that
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears
on the display.
1
TAPE
or
GAME/TV
Press and hold down the [TAPE]
or [GAME/TV] input selector but-
ton (about 3 seconds) to change
the setting.
2
TAPE
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
or
For the TAPE input selector, the setting
changes in this order:
GAME/TV
TAPE → MD → CDR
→
DOCK
For the GAME/TV input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
GAME/TV ↔ DOCK
Note:
• DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or
GAME/TV input selector, but not both at the same
time.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Digital Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
ENTER
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
ENTER
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Digital
Input,” and then press [ENTER].
]
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
ENTER
The Digital Input menu appears.
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
1-4.Digital Input
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
DVD
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
---
-
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
PREV
CH
ENTER
DISPLAY
MUTING
AUX2
TAPE
FRONT
---
TUNER
CD
PHONO
---
OPT2
---
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
NING MODE
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
COAX1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.
ENTER
These are the default assignments.
COAXIAL IN 1.
COAX2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 2.
COAX3: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 3.
OPT1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 1.
OPT2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
Input selector
DVD
Audio input
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
ENTER
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX 1
- - -
AUX 2
FRONT (Fixed)
- - -
TAPE
TUNER
CD
- - -
OPTICAL IN 2.
OPT2
- - -: Select if the component is
connected to an analog
PHONO
- - -
input.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
RECEIVER
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by
using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV receiver.
1
Notes:
MASTER VOLUME
selector.
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is
fixed at the “- - -” option.
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Video Setup” on page 54, this input assign-
ment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.
CLEAR
ON
OFF
R
DIGITAL
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
ENTER
TUNING
2, 3
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Press the input selector button
for the input selector that you
want to assign.
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
1
DVD
GAME/TV
TAPE
AUX 1
TUNER
AUX 2
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
Press the [DIGITAL INPUT]
button.
2
The current assignment is displayed.
DIGITAL INPUT
Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-
ton repeatedly to select an
option.
3
Available options are the same as for
the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on
page 58.
DIGITAL INPUT
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Analog Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “5. Analog
]
3
Input,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Analog Input menu appears.
ON
STANDBY
TV
1-5.Analog Input
INPUT
Multich
DVD
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
ENTER
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
PHONO.
]
4
5
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
ENTER
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
NING MODE
If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
DVD input selector.
Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-
channel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeat-
edly to select Multich (see page 78).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
ENTER
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
ENTER
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT
Automatic Speaker Setup
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)
Notes:
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers con-
nected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances
from the listening position and calculate the optimal
speaker settings for you automatically.
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the
Speaker Impedance setting before running the
automatic speaker setup (see page 51).
• Automatic speaker setup can only be used with
Speakers A.
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when the automatic speaker setup
starts.
Measurement Positions
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed
while a pair of headphones is connected, or Speak-
ers B is selected.
To create a listening environment in which several
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight
positions within the listening area.
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-
matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-
surement time varies depending on the number of
positions and speakers.
■ 1st measurement position
This is the center position of your listening area, or
the listening position if there’s only one listener.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
want to cancel the setup.
■ 2nd–8th measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the automatic speaker setup.
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
1
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
SETUP MIC
2, 9
2
REMOTE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
ENTER
,
+
CH
:
:
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Listening area
-
Listening position
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Turn on the AV receiver and the
connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV receiver is connected.
The speaker detect results
appear.
1
2
4
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
ENTER
-----SP Detect Result-----
FL : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : Yes
SBR : Yes
SW : Yes
SL : Yes
SBL : Yes
C : No
Place the setup microphone at
the 1st measurement position,
and connect it to the SETUP MIC
jack.
SETUP MIC
Next
Retry
Cancel
ENTER
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
“Yes” means that the speaker was
detected. “No” means that no speaker
was detected.
Please place microphone at center
of listening area at ear height.
If you agree with the results, use
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select Next, and then
press [ENTER].
Push Enter : Next
Notes:
The options are:
• Make sure the microphone is hori-
zontal.
Next: Proceed to the next step.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
• If there’s an obstacle between the
microphone and any speaker, the
automatic setup will not work cor-
rectly. Set up the room as you would
when enjoying a DVD movie.
The following screen appears.
5
• Positioning the microphone close to
where your ears would normally be
will provide the best results.You can
set the height of the microphone by
using a tripod or level table.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Please place microphone at
2nd Position at ear height.
Push Enter : Next
Press [ENTER].
3
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Place the setup microphone at
the next position (see page 61),
and then press [ENTER].
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few min-
utes.
ENTER
ENTER
Do not unplug microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
A test tone is output by each speaker in
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT deter-
mines which speakers are connected.
This takes a few minutes.
Do not unplug microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...
Note:
• If any extraneous noise is picked up
by the microphone, the automatic
setup may not work correctly, so
keep quiet.
When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.
6
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
After the 3rd or 7th measurement, the
following screen appears.
Review SP Distance: Review the
speaker distance settings (see
“Reviewing the Results” on
page 65).
7
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
ENTER
Please select “Next”, when measuring
next position, and select “finish”,
when ending.
Review SP Level: Review the speaker
levelsettings(see“Reviewing
the Results” on page 65).
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
Next
finish(Calculate)
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER].
Next: Select this if you want to mea-
sure another listening posi-
tion. After the 8th
]
If you selected “Save,” the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
10
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
measurement has been taken,
the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Saving...
Finish(Calculate):Select this if you
don’t want to measure any
more listening positions and
are ready to calculate the
Disconnect the setup micro-
phone.
11
results, then go to step 8.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
8
9
Please unplug microphone.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Calculating...
Notes:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
Equalizer Settings (page 101) will be set to Audyssey.
• You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.
When the calculations are com-
plete, the following screen
appears.
ENTER
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Error Messages
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following
error messages may appear:
ENTER
❑ Ambient noise is too high
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER].
Save: Save the calculated settings
and exit the automatic
Ambient noise is too high.
Retry
Cancel
speaker setup.
Review SP Config: Review the
speakerconfigurationsettings
(see “Reviewing the Results”
on page 65).
This message appears if there’s too much background
noise and the measurements cannot be performed prop-
erly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
❑ Speaker Detect Error
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
FL : Error
SL : Yes
SBL : Yes
C : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : Yes
SBR : Yes
SW : Yes
FL : Yes
SL : Yes
SBL : Yes
C : No
FR : Yes
SR : Yes
SBR : Yes
SW : Yes
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
There is a problem with a speaker. The speaker may be
broken or the subwoofer may be emitting sound that is
too high.
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
Speaker Detect Error
FL : Yes
SL : ---
SBL : ---
C : Yes
FR : No
SR : ---
SBR : ---
SW : ---
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
A different number of speakers has been detected.
❑ Writing Error
One of the front speakers has not been detected.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
FL : Yes
SL : ---
SBL : ---
C : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : No
SBR : ---
SW : ---
Writing Error!
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
One of the surround speakers has not been detected.
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV receiver may
be malfunctioning and you should contact your Onkyo
dealer.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
FL : Yes
SL : ---
SBL : ---
C : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : No
SBR : Yes
SW : ---
Retry
Cancel
The surround back speakers have been detected but the
surround speakers haven’t.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
FL : Yes
SL : ---
SBL : No
C : Yes
FR : Yes
SR : Yes
SBR : Yes
SW : ---
Retry
Cancel
The right surround back speaker has been detected but
the left surround back speaker hasn’t.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
Reviewing the Results
In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 94–101).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select the settings that
you want to review, and then
press [ENTER].
ENTER
Notes:
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-
over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see
page 94).
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
ENTER
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-
mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-
ally.
The options are:
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration
settings.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very
low-frequency sound and its position is usually low
down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,
select its highest crossover frequency, and then try run-
ning the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Config
Subwoofer
Front
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Full Band
80Hz
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
100Hz
150Hz
2ch
Review SP Distance
Review the speaker distance set-
tings.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Distance
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
15ft
15ft
15ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
15ft
Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Level
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
+12dB
0dB
–12dB
+3dB
+4dB
-6dB
-3dB
0dB
Press [RETURN] to return to the pre-
vious screen.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
TV Format Setup
(not North American models)
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. OSD Setup,”
and then press [ENTER].
]
3
4
ENTER
The OSD Setup menu appears.
6-2.OSD Setup
ON
STANDBY
Immediate Display
Monitor Type
Display Position
TV Format
On
4:3
Bottom
Auto
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
ENTER
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
Language
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
11
12
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “TV Format,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
ENTER
1
DIMMER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically detect
the TV system from the video
input signals.
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
your area is NTSC.
DISPLAY
MUTING
ENTER
PAL: Select if the TV system in
your area is PAL.
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
NING MODE
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
Note:
The main menu appears onscreen.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “6. Miscella-
]
2
neous,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
ENTER
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
AM Frequency Step Setup
(on some models)
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and
then press [ENTER].
]
3
4
ENTER
The Tuner menu appears.
7-3.Tuner
ON
STANDBY
AM Freq Step
9kHz
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
ENTER
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “AM Freq.
]
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
Step,” and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
in your area.
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
ENTER
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
ENTER
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
NING MODE
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
Note:
RECEIVER
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
ENTER
ENTER
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PlayingYour AV Components
Basic AV Receiver Operation
ON
STANDBY
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
+
TV CH
-
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
4
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
1
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
MASTER VOLUME
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
STANDBY/ON
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
STANDBY
READY
REMOTE MODE
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
1
4
PUSH TO OPEN
DIMMER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
1
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
2
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
PLAY MODE
Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.
1
Remote
controller
AV receiver
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR
buttons.
RECEIVER
DVD
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
TAPE
AUX 1
TUNER
AUX 2
CD
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
2
AUX1
5
GAME/TV
4
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PHONO
NET/USB
PHONO
+10
NET/USB
0
Remote
controller
To switch between Speakers A and Speak-
ers B, use the remote controller’s [SP A] and
[SP B] buttons.
A and B indicators
2
3
SP A
SP B
Start playback on the source component.
To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s con-
nected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI
OUT SUB, or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output
settings.
To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control or the remote
controller’s [VOL] button.
Remote
controller
4
AV receiver
MASTER VOLUME
Since the AV receiver is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for
+18.0 dB.
VOL
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 79.
5
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio
■ Manual Tuning Mode
Listening to AM/FM Stations
Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator disap-
pears from the display.
TUNING
MODE
1
TUNING MODE
TUNING
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
Press and hold theTUNING Up or
Down [ ]/[ ] button.
2
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
TUNING
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
TUNING
Press the button repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.
TUNER
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for
easy selection.
The North American model changes FM frequency in
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
In this example, FM has been selected.
TUNER
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
Band
Frequency
(Actual display depends on country.)
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode
Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator
TUNING
MODE
1
appears on the display.
Press the TUNING Up or Down
2
[
]/[ ] button.
TUNING
Searching stops when a station is
found.
TUNING
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears.
TUNED
AUTO
FM STEREO
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-
ing the appropriate frequency.
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
DISPLAY
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ON
STANDBY
ZONE
2
3
TV
ZONE
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
Number
buttons
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
D.TUN
11
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
Press the [DISPLAY] button to
display the available information.
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DISPLAY
Band
Frequency
Preset #
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [D.TUN] button.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.
1
2
RECEIVER
Listening mode
D. TUN
CLEAR
Note:
(Actual display depends on country.)
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 104), its name is displayed instead of the band
and frequency.
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the fre-
quency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PHONO
+10
NET/USB
0
Note:
• While the [RECEIVER] button is
flashing, you cannot select another
input source with the remote control-
ler.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
RDS Program Types (PTY)
Using RDS
Type
Display
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indi-
cator appears.
None
NONE
News reports
Current affairs
Information
Sport
NEWS
AFFAIRS
INFO
RDS indicator
SPORT
Education
EDUCATE
DRAMA
Drama
Culture
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED
■ What is RDS?
Science and technology
Varied
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail-
able in most European countries. RDS is approved by the
National Radio Systems Committee (NRSC) and is
available in North America.
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to dis-
playing text information, RDS can also help you find
radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock, etc.).
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS informa-
tion:
Pop music
Rock music
Middle of the road music
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
Weather
POP M
ROCK M
EASY M
LIGHT M
CLASSICS
OTHER M
WEATHER
FINANCE
CHILDREN
SOCIAL
RELIGION
PHONE IN
TRAVEL
LEISURE
JAZZ
Finance
Children’s programmes
Social affairs
Religion
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-
ing the [DISPLAY] button will display the frequency for
3 seconds.
Phone in
Travel
Leisure
RT (Radio Text)
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
Alarm test
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text will be shown on the display (see
page 72).
COUNTRY
NATION M
OLDIES
FOLK M
DOCUMENT
TEST
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type
(see page 72).
TP (Traffic Program)
Alarm
ALARM
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 72).
Notes:
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-
played when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Displaying Radio Text (RT)
To start the search, press
[ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
station of the type you specified, at
which point it stops briefly before con-
tinuing with the search.
4
5
RT/PTY/TP
MASTER VOLUME
ENTER
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
When a station you want to listen
to is found, press [ENTER].
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
ENTER
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text can be displayed.
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
once.
Listening to Traffic News (TP)
RT/PTY/TP
The RT information scrolls across the
display.
2
1
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
Notes:
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,
no RT information is available.
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
3
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.
2
3 1
4, 5
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.
1
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
2
3
TUNER
ZONE
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.
2
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
RT/PTY/TP
If the current radio station is broadcast-
ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
appear on the display and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broad-
cast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.
You can search for radio stations by type.
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.
1
TUNER
To locate a station that is broad-
casting TP, press [ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
station that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
3
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on
the display.
2
RT/PTY/TP
ENTER
Use the PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons
to select the type of program you
want.
3
PRESET
See the table on page 71.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Presets
Presetting AM/FM Stations
PRESET
2, 4
3
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
2
3
STANDBY/ON
ZONE
STANDBY
READY
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
TUNING
RETURN
SETUP
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
PRESET
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
CLEAR
ON
OFF
PUSH TO OPEN
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
TV
CABLE
SAT
SLEEP
DIMMER
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM and FM radio stations.
+
CH
CH +/–
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Tune into the AM or FM station
1
-
you want to store as a preset.
PREV
CH
MUTING
Press the [MEMORY] button.
The preset number flashes.
2
MEMORY
To select a preset, use the PRE-
SET [ ]/[ ] buttons or the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] but-
ton.
PRESET
While the preset number is flash-
ing (about 8 seconds), use the
PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons to
3
+
CH
DISC
PRESET
ALBUM
select a preset from 1 through 40.
-
Press the [MEMORY] button
again to store the station.
4
MEMORY
Deleting Presets
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
2
favorite stations.
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
Note:
• You can name your radio presets for easy identifica-
tion (see page 104).
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
1
2
While holding down the [MEM-
ORY] button, press the
TUNING
MEMORY MODE
[TUNING MODE] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
CLEAR
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
(North American model only)
-
TUN
8
TAPE
7
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conven-
tional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple
programs on the same frequency by using multicast
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song
title, artist name, and so on.
11
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
,
ENTER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:
www.ibiquity.com
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MUTING
www.hdradio.com
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see
page 69).You can store them as presets just like AM and
FM stations (see page 73).
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
AUDIO SEL
RC-687
M
If the currentAM or FM station supports HD Radio tech-
nology, the HD indicator lights up.
AUDIO SEL
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG
indicator lights up.
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
Station name
HD indicator
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
ENTER
DISPLAY
Song title
Artist name
HD Radio channel number
• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio
technology, the station’s name will be displayed
instead of the band and frequency.
• When music data is received, song title and artist name
information is displayed.
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast
channel will be displayed.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Note:
Selecting Multicast Channels
• Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital sig-
nal, so to select an audio format, you must select mul-
ticast channel #1 first.
FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs
on the same frequency by using what are calledmulticast
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program ser-
vices) indicator lights up.
Displaying HD Radio Information
Press [ENTER].
The SPS indicator flashes.
Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to cycle through
the available information.
1
ENTER
Frequency
Use the Up and Down Arrow
2
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a multi-
cast channel.
Station information
ENTER
If you select a multicast channel that is
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]
symbol will appear, indicating that the
channel has been reserved. When
broadcasting commences, that channel
will be selected automatically.
Artist information
Reserved channel indication
HD Radio channel number
Song title information
Within 5 seconds, press [ENTER] to set
the multicast channel.
Note:
• Multicast channels are not available
on AM.
Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital ver-
sions of their programs and you can choose which one
you want to listen to.
Use the [AUDIO SEL] button to
select Auto or Analog.
Remote
controller
AUDIO SEL
AV receiver
Auto: Select to use the digital sig-
AUDIO SEL
nal.
Analog: Select to use the analog sig-
nal.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions
This section explains functions that can be used with any
input source.
Adjusting Speaker Levels
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.
TUN
8
TAPE
7
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
Use the remote controller’s
Press
[RECEIVER]
first
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
[CH SEL] button to select each
speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]
and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume.
CH SEL
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
DIMMER
DISPLAY
SLEEP
You can adjust the volume of each
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).
+
LEVEL
LEVEL
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
MUTING
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
Notes:
STEREO
• You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is
muted.
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
CH SEL
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 94).
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
LEVEL – +
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-687
M
■ Headphones
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the
[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),
from –12 dB to +12 dB each.
MASTER VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
DIMMER MEMORY MODE
PHONES
SETUP
USB
PRESET
CLEAR
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
PHONES
DIMMER
DISPLAY
Muting the AV Receiver
Setting the Display Brightness
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Press the remote controller’s
[MUTING] button.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display.
Press the remote controller’s
[DIMMER] button repeatedly to
Remote
controller
MUTING
DIMMER
select:
• Normal + VOLUME light on.
• Normal + VOLUME light off.
• Dim + VOLUME light off.
AV receiver
DIMMER
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.
To unmute the AV receiver, press the remote control-
ler’s [MUTING] button again, or adjust the volume. The
Muting is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
You can also use the AV receiver’s
[DIMMER] button (not European mod-
els).
Tip:
• You can specify how much the output is muted with
the Muting Level setting (see page 106).
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions—Continued
Using the Sleep Timer
Displaying Source Information
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver so that
it turns off automatically after a specified period.
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
Remote
controller
Press the remote controller’s
Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
SLEEP
[SLEEP] button repeatedly to
select the required sleep time.
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
DISPLAY
AV receiver
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set, as shown. The specified sleep time
appears on the display for about 5 sec-
onds, then the previous display reap-
pears.
DISPLAY
The following information can typically be displayed:
SLEEP indicator
Input source
Listening
mode
Signal format*
To cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP] button
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [SLEEP]
button. Note that if you press the [SLEEP] button while
the sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep
time by 10 minutes.
Sampling
frequency
*If the input signal is analog, no format information is
displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling fre-
quency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but not
PCM, the signal format and the number of channels is
displayed. For some digital input signals, including mul-
tichannel PCM, the signal format, number of channels,
and sampling frequency is displayed.
Using Headphones
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s
PHONES jack.
Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the
previous display reappears.
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PHONES
POWER
ON
OFF
Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are
not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to Pure
Audio, Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays
the same.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions—Continued
Selecting Audio Inputs
Specifying the Digital Signal Format
1
2
REC
PLAYLIST
MASTER VOLUME
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STANDBY/ON
STEREO
STANDBY
READY
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
AUDIO SEL
DVD
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
RC-687
M
Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
If you connect a component to more than one audio
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the
[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you
want to use to listen to that component.
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-
ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.
repeatedly to select an audio
AUDIO SEL
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select Auto.
1
IN, and the HDMI indicator
appears on the display. (The
HDMI IN must already be
assigned to the current input
selector. See page 54.)
Auto: Selects the assigned COAX-
IAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL
tor appears on the display.
(The DIGITAL IN must
AUDIO SEL
While“Auto”is shown on the dis-
play, use the Left and Right
2
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
PCM: Only input signals in PCM
format are output, and the
PCM indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not PCM.
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 58.) If there is no digital
signal, the analog input is
used instead.
DTS: Only input signals in DTS
format are output, and the
DTS indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not DTS.
Multich:Selects the multichannel
cator appears on the display.
(The multichannel input must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 60.)
Auto(default):The format is detected
automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the
analog input is used instead.
Analog: Selects the analog input, and
the ANALOG indicator
appears on the display.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting with the Remote Controller
Selecting the Listening Modes
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
Listening Modes” on page 84.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
can only be selected if your DVD player is
connected to the AV receiver with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
• The listening modes you can select depends
on the format of the input signal. To check
the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-
tion” on page 77.
SURR
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
,
STEREO
STEREO
PURE A
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
ALL ST
THX
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
DIRECT
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
• While a pair of headphones is connected,
you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,
Direct, or Stereo listening mode.
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-687
M
Selecting on the AV Receiver
■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
STEREO
THX
■ [SURR] button
MASTER VOLUME
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ing modes.
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
■ [PURE A] button
LISTENING MODE
PURE AUDIO
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-
play is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output
video signals.
■ [PURE AUDIO] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-
play is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output
video signals. Pressing this button again will select
the previous listening mode.
■ [DIRECT] button
This button selects the Direct listening mode.
■ [THX] button
■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■ [ALL ST] button
■ [THX] button
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
mode.
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
Analog and PCM Sources
PCM
Multi
Multichannel PCM
32–96 kHz
*/2
176.4/192 kHz*1
Source format
channel
analog
176.4/
192kHz*1
32–96
kHz
except */2
2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel
2ch
Media
CD, TV, radio,
DVD
DVD DVD
Button
Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[SURR]
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*3
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx
THX*3
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
✔
✔
✔
✔*3
✔
Neo:6 THX*3
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
3
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
*1. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.
*4. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
and 88.2 kHz respectively.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources
DSD*1
Dolby D
Multichannel
Dolby Digital Plus
Multichannel
Multichannel
Source format
2ch 1/0, 1+1
2ch 1/0, 1+1
except
*/2
except
*/2
3/2
2ch
SACD
*/2
*/2
Media
DVD, DTV, etc.
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Button
Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby D
✔
✔
*2
✔*2
Dolby D Plus
✔
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[SURR]
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLIITHX Games Mode
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
[THX]
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
4
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct and Pure Audio, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
TrueHD and DTS Sources
TrueHD*1
DTS, DTS96/24
Multichannel
DTS-ES
Discrete/
Matrix
Multichannel
Source format
2ch
1/0, 1+1
2ch
1/0
except
*/2
except
*/2
*/2
*/2
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD
DVD, CD, etc.
Button
Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
✔
✔
*2
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
✔
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD
✔
✔
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[SURR]
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
[THX]
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
4
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1. 192 kHz TrueHD sources are processed as 192 kHz/2-channel audio signal, regardless its number of channels.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
*5. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Sources
DTS-HD Master Audio*1
Multichannel
DTS-HD High Resolution
Multichannel
except */2 */2
Source format
2ch
1/0
2ch
1/0
except */2
*/2
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Button
Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD
✔
✔
✔
✔
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[SURR]
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
Neo:6 Cinema
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1. 192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed at 96 kHz.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Dolby Digital
About the Listening Modes
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Dolby EX
Pure Audio
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the video circuitry
is turned off, only the HDMI outputs output video.)
Note:
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
Dolby Digital Plus
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
Direct
In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Dolby TrueHD
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24-
bit sampling rate and signal resolution.
Stereo
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
DTS NEO:6
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-
nel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing
a very natural and seamless surround sound experience
that fully envelops the listener.
Multichannel
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel
sources.
• NEO:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
• NEO:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-
nel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless sur-
round-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.
As well as music and movies, video games can also ben-
efit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.
DTS
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS 96/24
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-ES Discrete
THX
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-
crete soundtrack.
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-
dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.
• THX Cinema
This mode is for watching movies, which are typi-
cally recorded and edited on the assumption that they
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.
It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial character-
istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
smaller home-theater environment. It can be used
with 2-channel sources processed with other for-
mats, and multichannel sources. Surround back
speaker output depends on the source material and
the selected listening mode.
DTS-ES Matrix
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-
ES logo.
DTS-HD High Resolution
• THX Ultra2 Cinema
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-
position of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-
round back channel output.
DTS-HD Master Audio
• THX Music Mode
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-
nels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit
sampling rate and signal resolution.
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
• THX Games Mode
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
• THX Surround EX
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
Neural THX 5.1/7.1
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-
round on select channels, which the AV receiver can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.
DSD
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on SuperAudio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-
channel audio.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Mono Movie
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a
large hall.
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
Note:
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
This section explains how to record the input source and
how to record audio and video from separate sources.
Recording from Different AV Sources
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-
arate sources. This is possible because only the audio
source is switched when an audio-only input source,
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video
source remains the same.
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
cannot be recorded.
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to
the manuals supplied with your digital recording
equipment for more details.
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from
digital to analog or vice versa.
PUSH TO OPEN
AUX
2
INPUT
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video sig-
nals, so select another mode when recording.
Camcorder
video signal
audio signal
Recording the Input Source
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-
nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 33 to 49
for hookup information.
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
C
R/PR
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
ZONE2
R
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
OUT
(BTL)
FRONT
R
Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
1
DVD
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
CD player
VCR
See “Which Connections Should I
Use?” on page 34 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
GAME/TV
TAPE
AUX 1
AUX 2
CD
TUNER
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
You can watch the source while record-
ing it. The AV receiver’s MASTER
VOLUME control has no effect on
recording.
PHONO
NET/USB
1
Remote
controller
Prepare the VCR for recording.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
3
4
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
2
Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PHONO
+10
NET/USB
0
Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
On your recorder, start record-
ing.
2
Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.
5
On the source component, start
playback.
3
Note:
• If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Onscreen Setup Menus
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a conve-
nient way to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized
into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.
Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.ListeningMode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
Menu Map
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.
Main menu
Submenu
☞ pages 52–60
Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
1.Input/Output Assign
1.Monitor Out
2.HDMI Input
3.Component Video Input
4.Digital Input
5.Analog Input
4.Source Setup
5.Listening Mode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
☞ pages 94–102
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
☞ page 106
6.Miscellaneous
2.OSD Setup
page 51
☞ page 90
3.Audio Adjust
page 66
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
☞ page 108
7.Hardware Setup
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
6.Network
☞ pages 103–104
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
page 67
☞ page 110
8.Lock Setup
Lock
Unlocked
☞ page 92
5.Listening Mode Preset
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
11.NET/USB
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes
Using the Late Night Function
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you
don’t want to disturb anyone.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus sources, the options are:
11
RECEIVER
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
L NIGHT
Off: Late Night function off
(default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
range.
PREV
CH
High: Large reduction in dynamic
DISPLAY
MUTING
range.
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
are:
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
Auto: The dynamic range is con-
trolled automatically based
on the source material and the
current volume setting
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
Re-EQ
DVD
(default).
L NIGHT
RC-687
M
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Notes:
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
Using the Re-EQ Function
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there
will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS-
ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multi-
channel.
• The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV
receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
it will be set to Auto.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
RECEIVER
[Re-EQ] button.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.
Re-EQ
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Tone Control Settings
Audio Adjust
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
center, surround, and surround back speakers individu-
ally. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
■ Bass
RECEIVER
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct
or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3. Audio
]
2
Adjust,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Audio Adjust menu appears.
Adjusting the Tone on the AV Receiver
3.Audio Adjust
1
2
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
MASTER VOLUME
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
STANDBY
READY
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
ZONE
2
3
ZONE
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
3
4
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.
ENTER
1
2
The screen for that item appears.
TONE
ENTER
Use the Up [ ] and Down [
buttons to adjust.
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
]
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
The Audio Adjust menu items are
explained below.
]
ENTER
Notes:
• The tone can be adjusted for Speakers A or Speakers
B. The same values are used for both.
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV receiver when
the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
ENTER
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX lis-
tening modes.
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
5
Setup closes.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Direct Setting
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings
Delay Enable
PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
■ DSD
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is
selected.
■ Panorama
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP.
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
Multiplex/Mono Settings
Multiplex
■ Dimension
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
default value is 0. Higher settings move the sound field
forward. Lower settings move it backward.
■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are out-
put.
■ Center Width
Mono
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-
ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
value is 3.
■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel is output when
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output
(default).
L: Only the left channel is output.
R: Only the right channel is output.
■ Output Speaker
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right
Neo:6 Music
speakers.
■ Center Image
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 3.
(default).
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
■ DSD
Dolby Digital Settings
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.
■ Dolby EX
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-
dled.
■ Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
mode.
Manual:When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
any of the listening modes compatible with this
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
etc.).
Listening Mode Presets
On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a
default listening mode for each of the audio formats sup-
ported by each input selector. The AV receiver will then
select the listening mode automatically depending on the
format of the input signal. You can still select the other
listening modes, although the default listening mode will
be used the next time you turn on the AV receiver.
T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting
■ Listening Angle
INPUT SELECTOR
M
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-
distant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
30˚
YLIST
RANDOM
Narrow:Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
LFE Level Settings
The main menu appears onscreen.
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB
or –∞ dB.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select “5. Listening
Mode Preset,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Listening Mode Preset menu
appears.
ENTER
■ Dolby D
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital
sources.
5.Listening Mode Preset
■ DTS
ENTER
1.DVD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
■ Dolby TrueHD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD
sources.
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
11.NET/USB
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
192/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for high resolution
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
such as DVD-Audio.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and then press [ENTER].
The audio formats supported by that
input selector appear.
ENTER
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
5-x.Listening Mode Preset
Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
D.F.2ch
D.F.Mono
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
ENTER
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
If the input selector is assigned to an
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to
select the audio formats shown on the
following screen.
DSD Multi: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for DSD multichannel
sources, such as SACD.
5-x.Listening Mode Preset
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
Multich PCM
192k/176.4k
Dolby True HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
DSD
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
5
For the TUNER input selector, Analog
is the only format available.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an audio for-
]
4
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a lis-
tening mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 80).
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
ENTER
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS sources.
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-
tal or DTS.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-
ing mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via
HDMI).
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup
Speaker Setup
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively.
1
This section explains items on the Speaker Setup menu.
RECEIVER
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
Note:
INPUT SELECTOR
M
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
Speaker Type Front B is set to Not
Use.
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
SP A
SP B
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
ENTER
SETUP
2
3
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
AYLIST
RANDOM
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
]
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
ENTER
Speaker Settings
See “Speaker Settings” on page 51.
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
ENTER
Speaker Configuration
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency,
distance, and level for each speaker.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Config,” and then press [ENTER].
]
4
ENTER
You can choose which of the speakers you want to use
with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations, and
set the crossover frequencies, distances, and levels of the
front Speakers A and front Speakers B independently.
The other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround,
and surround back) use the same crossover frequencies,
distances, and levels for Speakers A and Speakers B.
The Speaker Config screen appears.
2-2.Speaker Config
Speakers A
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
LPF of LFE
Double Bass
Yes
Full Band
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
2ch
ENTER
120Hz
On
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:
Full Band, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz, 150 Hz, or
200 Hz.
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Surround,”and
then use the Left and Right
]
5
8
ENTER
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-
nected.
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-
nected.
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select None.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
Note:
ENTER
ENTER
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Front,” and
then use the Left and Right
]
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 6) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
6
7
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
9
buttons to select “Surr Back,”
and then use the Left and Right
Notes:
• This setting can be set independently
for front SpeakersA and front Speak-
ers B.
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround back speakers are con-
nected, select None.
ENTER
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer
(step 5) is set to No.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Center,” and
then use the Left and Right
]
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type Front
A or Front B is set to Bi-Amp or BTL
(page 51), Surround is set to None
(step 8), or Powered Zone 2 is being
used (page 121).
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no center speaker is connected, select
None.
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround
(step 8) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Surr Back Ch,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
• Cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51).
10
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
1ch: Select if one surround back
speaker is connected.
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 6) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
2ch: Select if two (left and right)
surround back speakers are
connected.
• For Speakers B, if any channel is set
to Full Band, Center is fixed at Full
Band.
ENTER
Notes:
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type Front
A or Front B is set to Bi-Amp or BTL
(page 51), SurrBack is set to None
(step 9), or Powered Zone 2 is being
used (page 121).
Continue with step 11 on the next page.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel
Double Bass
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.
This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set
to Full Band.
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
80 Hz (THX).
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off
(THX).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
11
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Double Bass,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
12
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a low-
ENTER
pass filter frequency.
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
The following low-pass filter frequen-
cies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, or 120 Hz.
Off(THX):The subwoofer only out-
puts the LFE channel.
On: In addition to LFE channel
sounds, the subwoofer out-
puts front left and right chan-
nel bass sounds.
Note:
ENTER
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
ENTER
Note:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
Continue with step 12 in the next col-
umn.
Continue with step 13 on the next page.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Setting Speakers A and Speakers B
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Center,” and
then use the Left and Right
]
15
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
NotUse: Select if you don’t want to
use the center speaker with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the center speaker with
If you’re using Speakers B, you can choose whether or
not to use the subwoofer, center, surround, and surround
back speakers with the Speakers A and Speakers B con-
figurations independently.You cannot choose whether or
not to use the front speakers.
ENTER
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use the remote controller’s [SP A] or [SP B] button to
select Speakers A or Speakers B, respectively.
Note:
• Cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51),
or Center (step 7) is set to None.
Press the Down [ ] button to
display the bottom half of the
Speaker Config screen.
13
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Surround,”and
then use the Left and Right
]
2-2.Speaker Config
16
Speakers A
Subwoofer
Front
Not Use
Use
Not Use
Use
ENTER
Center
Surround
Surr Back
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Use
NotUse: Select if you don’t want to
use the surround speakers
with Speakers A or Speakers
B.
Notes:
Use: Select if you do want to use
the surround speakers with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
• The bottom half of the Speaker Con-
fig screen can only be displayed
when the Speakers Type Front B set-
ting is set to something other than
Not Use (page 51).
ENTER
Note:
• Cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51),
or Surround (step 8) is set to None.
• You can switch between the Speak-
ers A and Speakers B settings on
either half of the Speaker Config
screen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“SurrBack,”and
then use the Left and Right
]
17
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
14
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
ENTER
NotUse: Select if you don’t want to
use the surround back speak-
ers with Speakers A or Speak-
ers B.
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
NotUse: Select if you don’t want to
use the subwoofer with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the subwoofer with Speakers
A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
with Speakers A or Speakers
B.
ENTER
ENTER
Note:
Note:
• Cannot be set if Subwoofer (step 5) is
set to No.
• Fixed at Not Use if Surround (step
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type Front
B is set to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 51),
SurrBack is set to None (step 9), or
Powered Zone 2 is being used
(page 121).
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Distance
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
18
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the
distance from each speaker to the listening position.You
can set the distances for front Speakers A and front
Speakers B independently. The other speakers (i.e., sub-
woofer, center, surround, and surround back) use the
same distance settings for Speakers A and Speakers B.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
1
RECEIVER
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively.
Note:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
SP A
SP B
Speaker Type Front B is set to Not
Use.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
]
3
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
buttons to select“3. Speaker Dis-
tance,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Distance screen appears.
ENTER
2-3.Speaker Distance
Unit
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
feet
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
ENTER
Note:
• Speakers that you set to No or None
in the Speaker Configuration
(page 94) cannot be selected.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Note:
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
5
buttons to select“Unit,”and then
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select:
]
ENTER
feet: Select if you want to enter
distances in feet. Can be set
from 0.5 to 30 feet in 0.5-foot
steps.
Speaker Level Calibration
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
meters: Select if you want to enter
distances in meters. Can be
set from 0.15 to 9 meters in
0.15-meter steps.
ENTER
With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-
ing position. You can adjust the levels of front Speakers
A and front Speakers B independently. The other speak-
ers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back)
use the same level settings for Speakers A and Speakers
B.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
6
]
ENTER
buttons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
Note:
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
because the test tone will be much louder.
Notes:
• You can specify different distances
for front SpeakersA and front Speak-
ers B, but not the other speakers (i.e.,
round back).
ENTER
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
1
RECEIVER
the currently selected speakers
(Speakers A or Speakers B) is set to
BTL (page 51), or Center is set to
None (page 94) or Not Use
(page 97).
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively.
Note:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
SP A
SP B
Speaker Type Front B is set to Not
Use.
tances cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51),
or Not Use (page 97).
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
2
Type Front A or Front B is set to Bi-
Amp or BTL (page 51), Surr Back is
set to None (page 94) or Not Use
(page 97), or Powered Zone 2 is
being used (page 121).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
3
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup
• The Subwoofer distance cannot be
set if Subwoofer is set to No
(page 95).
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
ENTER
Repeat step 6 for each speaker.
7
8
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
Repeat step 5 for each speaker
so that the volume of the test
tone from each speaker is the
same.
4
6
buttons to select “4. Level Cali-
bration,” and then press
[ENTER].
ENTER
The Level Calibration screen appears
and the pink noise test tone is output by
the front left speaker.
If you’re using a handheld sound level
meter, adjust the level of each speaker
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-
ing position, measured with C-weight-
ing and slow reading.
2-4.Level Calibration
ENTER
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-15.0dB
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
7
Note:
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speak-
ers set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 94).
Note:
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the
[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the
[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the
[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
5
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to adjust the level.
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
]
ENTER
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
for the subwoofer).
Notes:
• You can set different levels for front
SpeakersA and front Speakers B, but
not the other speakers (i.e., sub-
round back).
• The Center level cannot be set if the
currently selected speakers (Speak-
ers A or Speakers B) is set to BTL
(page 94) or Not Use (page 97).
cannot be set if the currently selected
speakers (Speakers A or Speakers B)
is set to BTL (page 51), or Surround
(page 97).
Front A or Front B is set to Bi-Amp
or BTL (page 51), Surr Back is set to
None (page 94) or Not Use
(page 97), or Powered Zone 2 is
being used (page 121).
• The Subwoofer levels cannot be set if
Subwoofer is set to No (page 95).
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Equalizer Settings
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
option to:
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
Manual:The equalizer for each
speaker can be set manually.
Audyssey:The equalizer for each
speaker is set automatically
by the Automatic Speaker
]
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
ENTER
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The vol-
ume of each speaker can be set on page 99. The Equal-
izer settings only apply to Speakers A and cannot be
adjusted while Speakers B is selected.
Setup function.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
If you selected Manual, continue with
the next step. If you selected Off or
Audyssey, go to step 8.
1
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Down [ ] button to
select “Channel,” and then use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select the speaker.
You can select: Front, Center, Sur-
round, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.
5
6
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
2
3
ENTER
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
ENTER
buttons to select a frequency,
and use the Left and Right
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost
that frequency.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
You can select: 63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz,
1000 Hz, 2500 Hz, 6300 Hz, or
16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or
160 Hz.
buttons to select “5. Equalizer
Settings,” and then press
[ENTER].
ENTER
ENTER
The Equalizer Settings screen appears.
Each band can be cut or boosted from
–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.
2-5.Equalizer Settings
Equalizer
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1000Hz
2500Hz
6300Hz
16000Hz
Manual
Front
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
ENTER
Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,
affect bass sounds; high frequencies,
such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up [ ] button to select
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
]
7
2
“Channel” again, and use the
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select another speaker.
ENTER
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
ENTER
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
4
buttons to select “6.THX Audio
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
8
ENTER
2-6.THX Audio Setup
Surr Back Sp Spacing
THX Subwoofer
BGC
1ft-4ft
Yes
Off
ENTER
Notes:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
192 kHz input signals.
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp
Spacing,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify
the distance between your sur-
round back speakers:
ENTER
THX Audio Setup
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if
your surround back speakers are
between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
ENTER
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your
surround back speakers are between 1
and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify
the distance between your surround back speakers. This
setting is used by Speakers A and Speakers B.
round back speakers are more than 4
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
Note:
• Cannot be set if Surr Back Ch is set
to 2ch (page 95), Speaker Type Front
A or Front B is set to Bi-Amp or BTL
(page 51), SurrBack is set to None
(page 95) or Not Use (page 97), or
Powered Zone 2 is being used
(page 121).
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Source Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “THX Sub-
woofer,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
a THX-certified subwoofer.
]
5
This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
ENTER
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
1
RECEIVER
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-
certified subwoofer.
input selector buttons to select
an input source.
ENTER
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
6
PHONO
+10
NET/USB
0
buttons to select “BGC,” and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select:
ENTER
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
2
3
Note:
• This setting is only available if THX
Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
]
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears. The
name of the currently selected input
selector is displayed in a box.
ENTER
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
7
4.Source Setup
DVD
ENTER
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
4
ENTER
The screen for that item appears.
ENTER
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 109), and your
TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed
delay time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parenthe-
ses.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
The Source Setup menu items are
explained below.
]
5
]
ENTER
Note:
• A/V Sync cannot be set when the PureAudio listening
mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is
used with an analog input source.
ENTER
Name Edit
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
selected, the custom name will appear on the display.
6
Select the input selector to which
1
you want to give a custom name.
To name a radio preset, use the
[TUNER] button to select AM or FM,
and then select the preset.
IntelliVolume
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
2
RECEIVER
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s
noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
]
3
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.
ENTER
A/V Sync
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to set the delay.
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
[ENTER].
4-2.A/V Sync
DVD
A/V Sync
(HDMI LipSync
100msec
60msec)
Press Enter to see picture
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[
buttons to select a character, and
then press [ENTER].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10
characters.
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
7
4
buttons to select “Name Edit,”
and then press [ENTER].
The Name Edit screen appears.
ENTER
ENTER
4-3.Name Edit
DVD
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[
]
Display
Name
Default
ENTER
[
]
buttons to select the incorrect char-
acter, and then press [ENTER]. The
character input screen opens.
ENTER
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[
]
buttons to select the correct charac-
ter, and then press [ENTER].
If you’re naming an item for the very
first time, go to step 6.
If the item already has a name, you can
select Default or Custom in step 5.
When you’ve finished, use the
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons
to display the following screen,
select “OK,” and then press
[ENTER].
8
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
5
6
buttons to select “Display,” and
ENTER
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select:
Default: The default name is dis-
played.
]
4-3.Name Edit
Name
[
]
ENTER
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Q
d
N O P
R S T U V W X Y Z
g
Custom:The custom name is dis-
played.
a
c
e
j
o m
b
f
h i
k
n o p q
u v w x y z
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘
ENTER
_
( ) +
= / , : ; ! ?
OK
*
Cancel
When Default is selected, the station’s
frequency appears on the display when
a radio preset is selected.
“OK”
Press the [SETUP] button.
9
Press the Down [ ] button to
select “Name,” and then press
[ENTER] to open the character
input screen.
Setup closes.
ENTER
4-3.Name Edit
Notes:
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press
[ENTER] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.
Name
[
]
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
ENTER
Q
d
N O P
R S T U V W X Y Z
g
a
c
e
j
o m
b
f
h i
k
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
radio presets.
n o p q
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘
u v w x y z
_
( ) +
= / , : ; ! ?
OK
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
buttons.
*
Cancel
Satellite Radio
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 109). See the
SIRIUS Parental Lock
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see
page 109). See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for
more information.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Miscellaneous Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.
]
ENTER
+10
0
M
The items are explained below.
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
ENTER
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
5
Setup closes.
AYLIST
RANDOM
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
Volume Setup
■ Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [ENTER].
]
2
3
Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,
Max.
Relative: Display range is –∞ dB, –81.5 dB,
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0 dB.
ENTER
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
6.Miscellaneous
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
ENTER
■ Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the Muting function is used (see page 76). It can be
set to –∞ dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
ENTER
■ Maximum Volume
The screen for that item appears.
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
ENTER
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be each
OSD Setup
time the AV receiver is turned on.
■ Immediate Display
This setting determines whether operation details are
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver
function is used.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if
the input source is connected to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
Note:
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher
than the Maximum Volume setting.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
Immediate Display be turned off.
■ Headphone Level
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-
phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
usually use when listening through your speakers. The
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.
■ Monitor Type
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
TV so that menus are displayed properly.
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.
■ Zone2 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2.
■ Display Position
This setting determines where on the screen operation
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
Top: Top of the screen.
■ TV Format
See “TV Format Setup (not NorthAmerican models)” on
page 66.
■ Zone2 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
■ Language
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus.You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
■ Zone3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
■ Zone3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Hardware Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
5
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
]
ENTER
The items are explained below.
Remote
indicator
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Number
buttons
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Setup closes.
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
Note:
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Remote Control
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
■ Remote ID
When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti-
ate the AV receiver from the other components, you can
change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.
YLIST
RANDOM
Note:
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure
to change the remote controller to the same ID (see
below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with
the remote controller.
1
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the TV [INPUT] button.
1
RECEIVER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.
2
3
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
ENTER
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
2
ENTER
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
6.Network
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
ENTER
The screen for that item appears.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 119.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Lip Sync
Tuner
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
the complex digital video processing being performed by
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV
receiver.
■ AM Freq Step (on some models)
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on
page 67.
■ Satellite Radio (on North American model)
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold sep-
arately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respectively. If
you connect both types of antenna, select XM/SIRIUS.
Otherwise, select None. See the separate Satellite Radio
Guide for more information.
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
Analog Multich
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
(see page 104).
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub-
woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
receiver’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.
■ xvYCC
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable
xvYCC color on the AV receiver with this setting.
Disable: xvYCC color disabled.
Enable: xvYCC color enabled.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB
or 15 dB setting.
■ Control
This function allows CEC-compatible components or
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to
be controlled with the AV receiver.
HDMI
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.
Enable: HDMI Control enabled.
■ HDMI Audio
This setting determines whether audio received by an
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may
want to change this setting to On if your TV is connected
to an HDMI output and you want to listen to audio from
an HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Nor-
mally, it should be set to Off.
Notes:
• HDMI control works only with the HDMI OUT
MAIN jack, not the HDMI OUT SUB jack.
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompat-
• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select
Disable instead.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).
On: HDMI audio is output.
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 43), if you turn up the
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
Notes:
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its
speakers.
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to
Auto.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be
output even if On is selected.
Power Control
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 43), if you turn up the
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
To link the power functions of CEC-compatible compo-
nents or RIHD-compatible components connected via
HDMI, select Enable.
Disable: Power Control disabled.
Enable: Power Control enabled.
Notes:
• The Power Control setting can be set only when the
above Control setting is set to Enable.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compat-
ible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver consumes more
power.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver enters Ready
mode when set to Standby, and the READY indicator
lights up instead of the STANDBY indicator (not
North American model).
TV Control
Select Enable to control the AV receiver from an RIHD-
compatible TV connected via HDMI.
Disable: TV Control disabled.
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Notes:
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re
note sure about its compatibility.
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above
Control and Power Control settings are both set to
Enable.
Note:
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your compo-
nents off and then back on again. Refer to the
instruction manuals for your other components.
Network
See “Network Settings” on page 117.
Lock Setup
Lock
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-
ing the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can
be accessed.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB
■ WAV
About NET/USB
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bitrates of 16 kbps are supported. Incompatible files
cannot be played.
The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can
hook it up to your home network with a standard Ether-
net cable and enjoy the music files stored on your com-
puter or media server. If your network is connected to the
Internet, you can also enjoy Internet radio.
• WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename
extension.
NET/USB can also be used to play music files stored on
USB mass storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and
MP3 players), which can be plugged into the AV
receiver’s front panel USB port.
■ M4A
M4A stands for MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 16 and 320 kbps, are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
Internet Radio
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing
times may not display correctly.)
With Internet radio you can:
• Listen to stations that use MP3 or WMA streaming.
• M4A files must have a “.m4a” or “.M4A” filename
extension.
• Select stations by entering the appropriate URL with
the remote controller, or connect to the AV receiver
from your computer and select stations in your Web
browser.
USB Mass Storage Device Requirements
• Preset up to 20 Internet radio stations.
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class.
Supported Audio File Formats
• Playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
For server and USB mass storage device playback, the
AV receiver supports the following music file formats:
MP3, WMA, WAV, and M4A (MPEG-4 Audio). It also
supports Microsoft’s PlaysForSure technology.
• USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file
system are supported.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, only music
files in the first partition can be played.
■ MP3
• MP3 files must be MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 format
with a sampling rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz
and a bit-rate of between 32 kbps and 320 kbps.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-
puts when playing music files.
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported.
(Playing times may not display correctly.)
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.
• MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename
extension.
Server Requirements
■ WMA
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
compression technology developed by Microsoft Corpo-
ration. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using
®
• Windows Media Player 11
Windows Media Player.
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
• UPnP AV-compatible media server
• DLNA-compatible media server
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 48 kbps and 320 kbps, and lossless
DRM are supported. Incompatible files cannot be
played.
Windows Media Player 11 and Windows Media Connect
2.0 can be downloaded for free from the Microsoft Web
site.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
may display incorrectly with VBR.)
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-
puts when playing music files.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Notes:
Minimum system requirements for Windows
Media Player 11 (for Windows XP)
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have
any problems with your Internet connection.
Operating system
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Profes-
sional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2), Update
Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005
(KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup for Windows XP
Media Center Edition (KB925766)
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see page 117.
Processor:
233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
64 MB
200 MB of free space
CD or DVD drive
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so
if you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you
must use a PPPoE-compatible router.
Memory:
Hard disk:
Drive:
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is
configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
for the AV receiver (see page 117).
Modem:
28.8 kbps
16-bit sound card
Sound card:
Monitor:
Video card:
Software:
Super VGA (800 x 600)
64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
using a Windows Mobile-based
Pocket PC or smartphone)
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
Netscape 7.1
Connecting the AV Receiver
To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug
one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV
receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end into
a LAN port on your router or switch.
Web browser:
Network Requirements
The following diagram shows how you can connect the
AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
■ Ethernet Network
The AV receiver’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For
best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is
recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a
computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly,
playback may be unreliable, so wired connections are
recommended.
TX-NR905
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
IN
V
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
2
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
■ Ethernet Router
S
T
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CEN
SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
VCR/DVR)
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
A router manages the network, routing data and supply-
ing IP addresses.Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev-
eral networked computers to access the Internet simul-
taneously via a single Internet connection. The AV
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
OPTICAL
PRE OUT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
ZONE2
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
L
FRONT
R
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
Internet
radio
OUT
ETHERNET
FRONT
R
(BTL)
)
Modem
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices,
allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
WAN port
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-
mended.
Router
LAN port
LAN port
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
LAN/Ethernet port
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-
mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
Computer or media server
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Playing Music Files on a Server
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a music file,and
press the [ENTER] or Play [
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
]
6
This section explains how to play music files on a com-
puter or media server through the AV receiver. See
page 111 for details on supported music servers and
music file formats.
]
ENTER
PLAY
4/125
Start your computer or media
server.
1
My favorite Album
Artist name
My favorite song 1
00:10
04:35
ENTER
Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button to select the
Server screen.
WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
2
NET/USB
RETURN
0
or
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop playback, press the Stop [ ]
button.
Server
1/2
Server1: Shared1
server: MYPC
To select the next song, press the Next
[
] button. To select the beginning of
the current song, press the Previous
] button. To select the previous
The NETWORK indicator lights up if
the AV receiver is able to establish a
connection to the server. It flashes if a
connection cannot be established.
[
song, press the Previous [
twice.
] button
Random Playback
Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [RANDOM] button.All of the songs
in the current folder will be played in random order.
When all of the songs in the folder have been played
once, they’ll all be played again in a different random
order. To cancel random playback, press the [RAN-
DOM] button again.
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
3
4
NET/USB
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select a server, and
then press [ENTER].
A list of items on the server appears.
ENTER
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
Server1: Shared1
1/10
Recently Added
Artists
Album
Songs
ENTER
Genre
Year
Rating
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] but-
ton repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat, All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat mode, all of the songs in the current folder are
played repeatedly.
In All mode, all of the songs on the current server are
played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
]
5
ENTER
A list of music files appears.
All Music
1/125
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
My favorite song 1
My favorite song 2
My favorite song 3
My favorite song 4
My favorite song 5
My favorite song 6
My favorite song 7
Note:
ENTER
• If the message “No item” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver
connections.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Windows Media Player 11 Setup
Playing Music Files on a USB Device
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your computer.
This section explains how to play music files on a USB
mass storage device. See page 111 for details on sup-
ported USB mass storage devices and music file formats.
TUNER
8
TAPE
7
9
Start Windows Media Player 11.
1
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
NET/USB
ENTER
11
On the Library menu, select Media Shar-
ing.
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
The Media Sharing dialog box appears.
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
Select the Share my media check box,
and then click OK.
3
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
A list of devices that support PlaysForSure
appears.
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Select the AV receiver in the list, and
then click Allow.
4
LIST
RANDOM
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
5
Plug your USB mass storage
device into the AV receiver’s USB
port.
1
2
You can now play the music files in your Win-
dows Media Player 11 library through the AV
receiver (see page 113).
Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button repeatedly to
select the USB screen.
NET/USB
Note:
0
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft Web site.
USB
USB Storage
1/1
The USB indicator lights up if the AV
receiver is able to read the USB mass
storage device. It flashes if it cannot
read it.
Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
3
NET/USB
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a USB mass
storage device, and then press
[ENTER].
A list of the device’s contents appears.
]
4
ENTER
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] but-
ton repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat, All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat mode, all of the songs in the current folder are
played repeatedly.
In All mode, all of the songs on the USB mass storage
device (in the same partition) are played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
USB Storage
1/15
Folder1
Folder2
ENTER
01_Song_Track1.WMA
02_Song_Track2.WMA
03_Song_Track3.WMA
04_Song_Track4.WMA
05_Song_Track5.WMA
06_Song_Track6.WMA
07_Song_Track7.WMA
08_Song_Track8.WMA
To open a folder, use the Up and Down
]/[ ] buttons to select it, and then
[
press [ENTER].
Notes:
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV
receiver’s USB port, we recommend that you use its
AC adapter to power it.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a music file,and
press the [ENTER] or Play [
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
]
5
]
ENTER
• Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer can-
not be played through the AV receiver in this way.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that sup-
port the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which
allows USB storage devices to be connected to com-
puters without the need for special drivers or software.
Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB MP3
player’s instruction manual for details.
PLAY
4/15
USB Storage
02_Song_Track2.WMA
--:--:--
00:10
ENTER
WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
RETURN
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot
be played.
or
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop or pause playback, press the
Stop [ ] or Pause [ ] button, respec-
tively.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the
loss or damage to data stored on a USB mass storage
device when that device is used with the AV receiver.
We recommend that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
To select the next song, press the Next
[
] button. To select the beginning of
the current song, press the Previous
] button. To select the previous
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed
with special music software, and iPods containing
music files managed with iTunes are not supported.
[
song, press the Previous [
twice.
] button
• Operation with all USB mass storage devices includ-
ing the ability to power them is not guaranteed.
• Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a
USB hub. The USB mass storage device must be con-
nected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.
Random Playback
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [RANDOM] button.All of the songs
in the current folder will be played in random order.
When all of the songs in the folder have been played
once, they’ll all be played again in a different random
order. To cancel random playback, press the [RAN-
DOM] button again.
• If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data,
the AV receiver make take a while to read it.
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Listening to Internet Radio
Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
2
3
To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV
receiver to a network with Internet access (see
page 112).
You can select Internet radio stations by entering the
appropriate URL with the remote controller, or by con-
necting to the AV receiver from your computer and
selecting stations in your Web browser.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are sup-
ported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by
the Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to
some stations.
NET/USB
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select an empty item,
and then press the [SETUP] but-
ton.
ENTER
The URL Input screen appears.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
Use the remote controller to
enter the URL of the Internet
radio station you want to listen
to.
Use the same method as for the Name
Edit function on page 104 to enter a
URL.
4
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
NET/USB
11
12
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
When you’ve finished, select
“OK,” and then press [ENTER].
The station appears in the list.
To update the station list, press
the [RETURN] button.
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
OR:
LIST
RANDOM
On your computer, start your
Web browser and enter the AV
receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL)
field.
The browser connects to the AV
receiver and displays the same screen
as the AV receiver.
Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button repeatedly to
select the Internet Radio screen.
1
NET/USB
0
Internet Radio
e-onkyo radio
1/20
with your browser.
Notes:
• The AV receiver’s IP address is
shown on the Network screen (see
page 117).
The NETWORK indicator lights up if
the AV receiver is able to establish a
connection to the network. It flashes if
a connection cannot be established.
• If you’re using DHCP, your router
may not always allocate the same IP
address to the AV receiver, so if you
find that you can’t connect to the AV
receiver, recheck the AV receiver’s
IP address on Network screen.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Network Settings
Press [ENTER].
The station’s programs are displayed.
5
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s
network settings manually.
ENTER
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need
to change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these set-
tings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet
networking is essential.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a program, and
then press [ENTER].
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
]
6
ENTER
What’s DHCP?
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices
to automatically configure themselves on a network.
PLAY
1/45
ENTER
iRadio station name
Streaming program name
What’s DNS?
--:--:--
01:29
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses
DNS to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.
RETURN
Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it
on the Internet Radio screen, and then press [ENTER] to
start playback.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Notes:
• When connected to an Internet radio station that uses
the MP3 streaming format, the MP3 indicator lights
up. When connected to an Internet radio station that
uses the WMA streaming format, the WMA indicator
lights up.
RECEIVER
• If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem or ISDN), depending on the station,
Internet radio may not work satisfactorily. For best
results, use a broadband connection (e.g., cable
modem, xDSL modem, etc).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
ENTER
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
ENTER
6.Network
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
DHCP
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select “6. Network,”
and then press [ENTER].
3
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
Enable: DHCP enabled.
ENTER
The Network screen appears.
7-6.Network
Disable: DHCP disabled.
MAC Address
xx : xx : xx : xx : xx : xx
If you select Disable, you must configure the IPAddress,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings your-
self.
Control
Enable
60000
ENTER
Port
DHCP
Enable
IP Address
xxx . xxx . xxx . xxx
Subnet Mask
xxx . xxx . xxx . xxx
DNS Server
xxx . xxx . xxx . xxx
Proxy URL
IP Address
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided by your
ISP.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Proxy Port
xxxxx
The IP address must be within the following ranges.
Class A: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
Class B: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
Class C: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select the settings,
and use the Left and Right
]
4
5
ENTER
[
]/[ ] buttons to set them.
Subnet Mask
To enter an IP address, select the set-
ting, and then press [ENTER]. The
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons can
then be used to enter numbers. Press
[ENTER] again to set the number.
The settings are explained on the next
page.
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a subnet mask address.
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically: 255.255.255.0).
Gateway
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a gateway address.
Setup closes.
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
DNS Server
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
Mac Address
Proxy Port
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.
Control
This setting enables or disables control over the network.
Enable: Control over the network enabled.
Disable: Control over the network disabled.
■ Port
This is the network port used for control over the net-
work.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers to an
Amp in Zone 2
Connecting Zone 2
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis-
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.
with a different source in each room.
Hookup
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers Directly
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
to the AV receiver
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a
different source in each room. This is called Powered
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.
on your Zone 2 amp.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 2 amp.
Main room
Hookup
TV
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.
Main room
AV receiver
TV
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
L
R
PRE OUT
AV receiver
Zone 2
ZONE2 R
ZONE2 L
IN
R
L
Receiver/
integrated amp
Zone 2
R
L
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no vol-
ume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 122).
To use this setup, you must set the Speaker Type
Front B setting to Not Use (see page 51), and set the
Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (see page 121).
Notes:
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the
AV receiver.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if Speaker Type Front
A is set to Bi-Amp or BTL, or Speaker Type Front B
is set to Normal, Bi-Amp, or BTL (page 51).
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2 Video Output
Connecting Zone 3
The AV receiver features a composite video output for
connection to a TV in Zone 2, so you can enjoy both
audio and video in that zone.
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.
ConnectingYour Zone 3 Speakers
Hookup
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 2.
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
Hookup
Main room
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 3 amp.
TV
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 3 amp.
Main room
AV receiver
ZONE 2
OUT
TV
Zone 2
AV receiver
TV
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
L
R
Note:
PRE OUT
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-
nents connected to composite video inputs and
S-Video inputs.
Zone 3
IN
R
L
Zone 2 12V Trigger
Receiver/
integrated amp
When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the ZONE 2
12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliam-
peres max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2 will make that compo-
nent turn on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off
on the AV receiver.
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be
set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no vol-
ume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 122).
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Powered Zone 2 Setting
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
Zone 3,”and then press [ENTER].
]
3
4
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV
receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2
Speakers Directly to the AV receiver” on page 119, you
must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (Activated).
ENTER
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Not Act
Fixed
Zone3 Out
Fixed
ENTER
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Powered
Zone 2,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
NotAct: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals not activated (Powered
Zone 2 disabled).
]
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
ENTER
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals activated (Powered Zone
2 enabled).
+
ENTER
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
LIST
RANDOM
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
Notes:
RECEIVER
• WhenAct is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the Zone 2
speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals output sound, but the surround back speakers con-
nected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker terminals do
not. When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned off, the
surround back speakers output sound as normal.
The main menu appears onscreen.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if Speaker Type Front
A is set to Bi-Amp or BTL, or Speaker Type Front B
is set to Normal, Bi-Amp, or BTL (page 51).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
ENTER
ENTER
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV
receiver.
Note:
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
1
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
RECEIVER
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
TONE
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
4
MASTER VOLUME
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
STANDBY
READY
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
1
AUX
2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
DISPLAY
PUSH TO OPEN
TUNING
PRESET
RETURN
ZONE
ZONE
2
3
OFF
LEVEL
TONE
HDMI OUT
STEREO
THX
SETUP MIC
AUX
2
L
INPUT
TUNING
PHONES
POWER
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE
SETUP
USB
CLEAR
ON
OFF
DIGITAL INPUT
LISTENING MODE
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING
ENTER
OFF
,
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
]
STANDBY
ON
ON
STANDBY
TV
Zone 3,”and then press [ENTER].
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
INPUT
ENTER
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
INPUT
SELECTOR
-
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Not Act
Fixed
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
12
0
Zone3 Out
Fixed
11
ENTER
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
ZONE3
ZONE2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select“Zone 2 Out”or
“Zone 3 Out,” and use the Left
and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select:
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume
must be set on the amp in that
zone.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER
-
PREV
CH
MUTING
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 vol-
ume can be set on the AV
receiver.
SP
A
SP
B
ENTER
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
LEVEL–,
LEVEL+
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-687
M
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
• On the North American model, you can select a differ-
ent radio source for each room. For example, XM for
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for
Zone 3.
Selecting an Input Source for Zones
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button.
1
Remote
controller
ZONE
3
2
Turning Off Zones
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
ZONE
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button.
1
AV receiver
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes, and the input selector currently
selected for the zone appears on the dis-
play.
Remote
controller
ZONE 2
ZONE
3
2
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
ZONE
ZONE 3
AV receiver
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.
On the remote controller, use the
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.
ZONE 2
2
Remote
controller
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
ZONE 3
On the AV receiver, use the input
selector buttons, or press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button
repeatedly
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
On the remote controller, press
the [STANDBY] button.
2
PHONO
+10
NET/USB
0
Remote
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, the name of the input selec-
tor appears on the display, and the
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights
continuously.
controller
STANDBY
On the AV receiver, press the
[OFF] button.
AV receiver
ZONE 2
The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2
or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.
AV receiver
OFF
ZONE 3
Notes:
• To select AM or FM, press the [TUNER] input selec-
tor button repeatedly. On the North American model,
you can also select XM or SIRIUS.
Note:
• When Zone 2 is turned off, the output from the
ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT goes low (0 volts).
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes
that require surround back speakers (6.1/7.1), such as
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema,
are unavailable.
• When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the
ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
Standby and Direct Change
work.
functions do not
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Adjusting the Volume of Zones
Muting Zones
Remote
controller
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
use the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+]
buttons.
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press the [MUTING] button.
ZONE
3
2
ZONE
3
ZONE
ZONE
2
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [ZONE 2] or
[ZONE 3] REMOTE MODE button,
and then press the [MUTING] but-
ton again.
LEVEL
LEVEL
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button,
press the [LEVEL] button, and
then use the Up [ ] and Down
MUTING
AV receiver
[
] buttons.
Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
1
AV receiver
ZONE 2
Adjusting the Balance of Zones
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
1
ZONE 3
TONE
AV receiver
ZONE 2
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble.
2
3
ZONE 3
TONE
Use the Up [ ] and Down [
]
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bal-
ance.
2
3
buttons to adjust the bass or tre-
ble.
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Use the Up [ ] and Down [
]
buttons to adjust the balance.
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB
to the left in 2 dB steps.
Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out
setting is set to Fixed (page 122).
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out set-
ting is set to Fixed (page 122).
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
Using the Remote Controller in
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when
it’s installed inside a cabinet.
IR IN
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the
connecting block.
Inside
cabinet
Remote controller
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
IR Receiver
Connecting
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through
to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked
up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not
output.
block
Remote controller
Main room
Zone 2/3
IR Receiver
Connecting
Signal flow
block
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown
below.
IR IN
AV receiver
IR OUT
IR Emitter
From the connecting block
Remote controller
Other component
Miniplug cable
IR
IN
Signal flow
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
IR OUT jack, as shown below.
OUT
AV receiver
Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control
sensor
Emitter
IR
IN
Miniplug
IR Emitter
OUT
AV receiver
Signal flow
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
You can control your other components, including those
This section explains how to:
• Enter the remote control code for a component that
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button to which you want
to enter the code, press the
[STANDBY] button.
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD/DOCK
The Remote indicator lights up.
CABLE
SAT
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 129).
• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence
of up to eight remote control actions (see page 130).
STANDBY
Entering Remote Control Codes
To control another component, you must first enter that
component’s remote control code to a REMOTE MODE
button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component
that you want to control.
Within 30 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the 4-digit
remote control code.
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
2
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Remote
indicator
NET/USB
0
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
TV
I
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
Number
buttons
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Press the REMOTE MODE button
again to select the remote con-
troller mode, point the remote
controller at the component, and
check the operation.
If the remote controller doesn’t work as
expected, and several remote codes are
listed, try each one in turn and use the
one that works best.
4
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
0
11
12
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
REMOTE
MODE
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
Notes:
PREV
CH
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the
[RECEIVER], [ZONE 2], [ZONE 3], and [NET/USB]
REMOTE MODE buttons.
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the
time of printing but subject to change.
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons
are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-687
M
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder,
MD recorder or Onkyo RI Dock, enter the appro-
priate remote control code to the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button.
Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
1
The codes are organized by category.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Note:
• If you connect an
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
Onkyo components that are connected via
are con-
trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.
GAME/TV jacks, for
set the Input Display accordingly (see page 57).
to work properly, you must
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
Make sure the Onkyo component is con-
1
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
nected with an
cable and an analog
audio cable (RCA).
See page 49 for details.
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button that you want to
1
REMOTE MODE
Enter the appropriate remote control code
to the REMOTE MODE button.
2
reset, press the TV [
] button.
DVD
VCR
The Remote indicator flashes three
times.
CD
TV
CDR/MD/DOCK
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
CABLE
SAT
5002: Onkyo DVD player with
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6002: Onkyo CD player with
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with
Press the REMOTE MODE button
again.
2
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
REMOTE MODE
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been
reset.
The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE
MODE buttons are preprogrammed
with remote control codes for control-
ling Onkyo DVD players and CD play-
ers, respectively. When these buttons
are reset, the preprogrammed codes are
restored.
DVD
VCR
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with
CD
TV
CDR/MD/DOCK
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
CABLE
SAT
6004: Onkyo RI Dock with
See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point
the remote controller at the AV receiver,
and operate the component.
3
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control
Resetting the Remote Controller
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via
the following remote control codes:
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
, use
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
1
5001: Onkyo DVD player without
(default)
RECEIVER
ton, press the [STANDBY] button.
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
The Remote indicator flashes five
times.
6001: Onkyo CD player without
(default)
STANDBY
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.
2
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
RECEIVER
6003: Onkyo RI Dock without
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons first.)With some components, certain buttons
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.
■ Controlling a TV
■ Controlling a VCR
■ Controlling a Satellite or
Cable Receiver
Press [VCR] first
Press [CABLE] (SAT) first
Press [TV] first
ON
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
TV
A
2
TV
TV
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
A
2
5
3
A
2
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
+
TV CH
-
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
AUX1
5
AUX2
AUX
6
2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
TV VOL
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
6
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
0
11
12
11
12
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
3
3
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
ZONE
3
2
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
REMOTE MODE
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
CDR/MD/DOCK
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
DIMMER
DIMMER
8
8
3
8
9
8
4
9
4
+
+
+
CH
CH
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER
VOL
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
DISC
ALBUM
-
-
-
8
7
PREV
CH
8
6
9
9
PREV
CH
PREV
CH
4
8
DISPLAY
MUTING
5
8
5
6
DISPLAY
MUTING
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
8
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
7
SP
A
SP
B
SP
A
SP
B
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
LISTENING MODE
SURR
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
STEREO
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
7
DVD
DVD
DVD
RC-687
M
RC-687
M
RC-687
M
A [ON], [STANDBY],TV [
]*
A [ON], [STANDBY]
A [ON], [STANDBY]
Set the TV to On or Standby.
Set the satellite/cable receiver to
Set the VCR to On or Standby.
B Number buttons
On or Standby.
B Number buttons
Enter numbers.
B Number buttons
Enter numbers.
C [CH +/–],TV CH [+]/[–]*
Enter numbers.
C [CLEAR]
Select channels on the TV.
C [CLEAR]
Cancels functions.
D [PREV CH]
Cancels functions.
D [CH +/–]
Selects the previous channel.
D [CH +/–]
Selects channels on the VCR.
E [TV INPUT]*
Selects satellite/cable channels.
E [PREV CH]
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
E [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.
F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*
Selects the previous channel.
F REC [
]
Adjust the TV’s volume.
F [GUIDE]
Starts recording.
G [MUTING]
Displays the program guide.
G Eject [
]
Mutes the TV.
G [ ], [
]
Ejects the videocassette.
Rewind and Fast forward.
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
H [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
]
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and
Fast forward.
Navigate menus on the TV.
Navigate menus on the satel-
lite/cable receiver.
I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)
are exclusively for controlling a TV
and can be used at any time, regard-
less of the currently selected remote
controller mode.
Navigate menus on the VCR.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Learning Commands
Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose com-
mand you want to learn until the
Remote indicator flashes.
3
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote indicator flashes twice.
[
] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
remote control code (page 126) but some buttons don’t
work as expected.
V O L U M E
M U T
T O N E
T E S T
C H S E L
C
P R E T
T U N E R
D V D
T
I N P U T
M U L T I - C H
P H O N O
G R O U P
M O D E
S U R
N
T U
D I S C
C
D
E R
V I D E O - 2
About 2 to 6
inches (5–15 cm)
I N P U T L E C T O R
T P E
D I M M
V I D E O - 1
Remote
indicator
S L E E P
D V
P O W E R
ON
STANDBY
O
N
TV
D
S
V
T
A
N
D
D
G
1
INPUT
A
M
B
E
D
Y
/T
4
C
R
1
V
T
/D
A
P
V
R
2
E
7
AUX1
PHONO
10
I
C
+
5
B
T
V
T
L
-
U
/
-
S
A
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
/
-
N
E
3
T
-
-
R
A
U
N
8
IN
P
U
1
E
INPUT
0
SELECTOR
T/US
X
2
1
T
6
0
B
C
D
DVD
+
MACRO
T
9
V
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
1
D.TUN
C
1
CLEAR
H
2
R
EM
VCR
O
T
V
1
2
TE
M
V
CABLE
3
O
L
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
O
DE
SAT
CDR/MD/DOCK
CD
Z
N
O
ET/USB
N
E
3
Z
O
N
E
2
RECEIVER
TAP
E/AMP
SLEEP
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
RC-687M
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any REMOTE MODE button
when you’ve finished.
11
4
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
1, 4
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
Notes:
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
+
REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV [
TV [INPUT], TV CH [+]/[–], TV VOL [ ]/[ ],
Light.
],
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for
controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and
DVD players. However, they can learn new com-
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-
mands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(see page 127).
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button for the mode in
which you want to use the com-
mand, press the [ON] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.
1
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD/DOCK
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
ON
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
Press the button you want to
learn the new command.
2
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Using Macros
Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press the following buttons:
[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]
REMOTE MODE, Play [ ].
2
You can program the remote controller’s MACRO but-
tons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-
ing actions:
1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button
to select the Receiver remote controller mode.
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to
select the CD input source.
4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select
the CD remote controller mode.
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the
When you’ve finished, press the
MACRO button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
If you enter eight commands, the pro-
cess will finish automatically.
3
CD player.
Note:
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are
taught new commands, the macro will no longer work
properly and will have to be made again.
You can program a MACRO button so that all five
actions are performed with just one button press.
Making Macros
Running Macros
Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to eight commands.
Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]
button.
Remote
The commands in the macro are trans-
mitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote control-
ler pointed at the AV receiver until all
of the commands have been transmit-
ted.
indicator
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
Macros can be run at any time, regard-
less of the current remote controller
mode.
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
11
MACRO
1, 2, 3
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
REMOTE
MODE
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
Deleting Macros
While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the MACRO button
1
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button of the remote con-
troller mode you want to use at
the start of the macro, press
MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
The Remote indicator lights up.
RECEIVER
1
REMOTE MODE
whose macro you want to delete.
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD/DOCK
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
Press the MACRO button again.
2
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to
unmute the AV receiver (page 76).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the main room
speakers (page 77).
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [STANDBY/ON] button. “Clear”
will appear on the display and the AV receiver will
enter Standby mode.
STANDBY/ON
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 46).
• Check the speaker settings (pages 94–101).
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it
to Auto (page 78).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.
VCR/DVR
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
Power
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 91).
Can’t turn on the AV receiver
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall
outlet properly.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5
seconds or more, then plug it back in again.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned
on
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono
speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C
(page 91).
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon-
nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and
contact your Onkyo dealer.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The surround speakers produce no sound
the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-
round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 79).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
Audio
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet
selector (page 58).
The center speaker produces no sound
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 91).
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected
(page 78).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 33).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal (page 25).
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume (page 68). The AV receiver is
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide
volume range for precise adjustment.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The surround back speakers produce no sound
• The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-
tening modes. Try another listening mode (page 79).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
back speakers with some sources.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
round back speakers produce no sound (page 119).
About DTS signals
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-
function.
The subwoofer produces no sound
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-
stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listen-
ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV receiver does not
switch formats immediately, you may not hear any-
thing, in which case you should stop your player for
about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback
DTS material properly even though your player is con-
nected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency
response changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recog-
nize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you
may hear noise.
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if Speaker Type Front
A is set to Bi-Amp or BTL, or Speaker Type Front B
is set to Normal, Bi-Amp, or BTL (page 51).
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-
nals, sound may not be output immediately.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-
round back speakers produce no sound (page 119).
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
Video
There’s no picture
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 106).
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has
been adjusted (pages 76 and 99), the maximum vol-
ume may be reduced.
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 33).
• Make sure that each video component is properly con-
nected.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
video circuitry is turned off and only the HDMI OUT
outputs video signals.
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, set the
video sources.
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENTVIDEO
OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No (page 52),
and select “- - -” in the “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 56 to watch composite video and
S-Video sources.
input, your TV must be connected to the COMPO-
NENT VIDEO OUT or HDMI OUT (page 34).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT
(page 34).
Noise can be heard
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio
performance, so don’t use them.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 89).
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 38).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 60).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 78).
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
• When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the
Resolution setting is set to anything other than
Through (see page 52), no video is output by the
HDMI OUT.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not
support the current video resolution and you need to
select another resolution on your DVD player.
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 129).
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via
, point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 127).
The onscreen menus don’t appear
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected
via
, or another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at that component. Be sure to
enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 126).
The picture is distorted
• On non-North American models, specify the TV sys-
tem used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on
page 66.
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.
Tuner
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers
from hiss, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
light up
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the AV receiver away from your TV or com-
puter.
• Listen to the station in mono (page 69).
• When listening to anAM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
Recording
Can’t record
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
• When the PureAudio listening mode is selected, video
recording is not possible because no video signals are
output. Select another listening mode.
Remote Controller
The remote controller doesn’t work
rect polarity (page 15).
away from the AV receiver and there’s no obstruction
remote control sensor (page 15).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (page 16).
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 126).
Can’t control other components
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (page 16).
• If you’ve connected an
-capable Onkyo MD
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,
respectively (see page 57).
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
Music Server and Internet Radio
Others
Can’t access the server or Internet radio
• Check the network connection between the AV
receiver and your router or switch.
The sound changes when I connect my head-
phones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
same.
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
• Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV receiver (page 111).
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• Check the Network settings (page 117).
• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex set-
Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
The
• To use
functions don’t work
• Make sure your server is compatible with the AV
receiver (page 111).
, you must make an
connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-
nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected digi-
tally (page 49).
• If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the
don’t work.
functions
• If the server is serving large music files to several net-
worked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the net-
work, upgrade your network, or use a switch instead
of a hub.
The AV receiver’s display doesn’t work
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen-
ing mode is selected. Select another listening mode.
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal pro-
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
in again.
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on
Network screen.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-
rectly.
• Check the Network settings (page 117).
USB Mass Storage Device Playback
Can’t access the music files on a USB device
• Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
For North American and Australian models, set the AV
receiver to Standby before disconnecting the power
cord from the wall outlet. For other models, set the AV
receiver to Standby and the POWER switch to OFF
before disconnecting the power cord.
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class. However, play-
back may not be possible with some USB devices even
if they conform to the USB mass storage device class.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier Section
General
Rated Output Power
North American:
Power Supply
North American:
European:
Asian:
Power Consumption
North American:
European and Asian: 1000 W
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz
AC 120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
170 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
180 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
9.8 A
435 × 194 × 458.5 mm
17-1/8"
×
7-5/8"× 18-1/16"
European:
Weight
North American:
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
24.5 kg
54.0 lbs.
Asian:
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
European and Asian: 24.3 kg
53.6 lbs.
Maximum Output Power
Asian:
■ Video Input
7 ch × 280 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)
HDMI
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
Dynamic Power
400 W (3Ω, Front)
300 W (4Ω, Front)
180 W (8Ω, Front)
Component
Composite
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
Damping Factor
S-Video
0.05% (Power Rated)
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8Ω)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance
■ Video Output
HDMI
Component
200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT,
ZONE2 OUT
Output Level and
Impedance
Phono Overload
Frequency Response
Tone Control
Composite
200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
S-Video
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs
COAXIAL (IN 1, IN 2, IN 3),
OPTICAL (IN 1, IN 2), DIGITAL
PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2
Signal to Noise Ratio
Speaker Impedance
Analog Inputs
4Ω–16Ω
Video Section
Multichannel Inputs
7.1 ch
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Component and S-VideoY)
0.7 Vp-p /75Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75Ω (S-Video C)
■ Audio Outputs
Digital Output
Analog Outputs
OPTICAL (OUT)
TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Composite)
Component Video
Frequency Response
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB
Multichannel Pre
Outputs
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
Speaker Outputs
7
1
Tuner Section
ZONE2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,
SURR BACK L, ZONE2 L
■ FM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
Phones
PHONES
87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz
European and Asian: 87.5 MHz– 108.0 MHz
■ Control Terminal
MIC
Yes
■ AM
Tuning Frequency Range
Ethernet
RS232
1
1
North American:
European and Asian: 522 kHz–1611 kHz
530 kHz–1710 kHz
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out
1/1
1
■ Digital Tuner
North American:
XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
Preset Channel
40
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452
HOMEPAGE
http://www.onkyo.com/
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.ch.onkyo.com/
Printed in Japan
I0706-1
SN 29344532
(C) Copyright 2007 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 3 4 4 5 3 2 *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Miele Double Oven H4112B User Manual
Miele Oven H 5460 BP User Manual
Miller Electric Welder GA 16C User Manual
NEC Home Security System HT410 User Manual
Nintendo Video Game Console 45496880019 User Manual
OPTI UPS Power Supply DSD31 DSD33 User Manual
Panasonic Computer Drive CF VDR302U User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Telephone KX TC1000B User Manual
Panasonic DVD Recorder DMR EZ47VEB User Manual
Panasonic Laptop Docking Station CF VEB612A User Manual